AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models

AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop AmpliTube 5 is available in different versions. The difference between the different versions is in the number of gear models included and in the features available. While consulting this manual, please refer to the specific gear models and features available in the AmpliTube 5 version you are using. 2 Gear Models AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models Table of Contents Contents3 Stomp Box Effects20 AmpliTube Delay20 Delay20 EchoMan21 TapDelay22 AmpliTube Distortion24 AmpLess24 BigPig26 Crusher27 Diode Overdrive28 Distortion29 Feedback30 Metal Distortion31 Metal Distortion 232 Overdrive33 OverScream34 PROdrive35 The Ambass’dor36 VariDiode+37 AmpliTube Dynamics38 Compressor38 Dcomp39 Noise Gate40 AmpliTube EQ41 7 Band Graphic41 10 Band Graphic42 AmpliTube Filter43 Envelope Filter43 LFO Filter44 Rezo45 Step Filter47 Wah49 3 Contents AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models Wah 1050 Wah 4751 Nu-Tron III52 AmpliTube Modulation53 Analog Flanger53 Chorus54 Chorus-155 Electric Flanger56 Flanger57 Metal Flanger58 Phaze Nine59 Phazer 1060 Small Phazer61 AmpliTube Pitch62 Harmonator62 Octav63 Pitch Shifter64 Wharmonator65 AmpliTube Other66 Acoustic Sim66 Step Slicer67 Swell68 Volume69 AmpliTube SVX70 SVX-OD 70 SVX-OCT71 Analog Chorus 72 Analog Delay73 Bass Wah74 SVX Compressor75 SVX Envelope Filter76 SVX Volume77 AmpliTube X-GEAR78 AmpliTube X-DRIVE78 AmpliTube X-VIBE79 4 Contents AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube X-TIME80 AmpliTube X-SPACE81 AmpliTube TONEX Stomp82 Overview82 AmpliTube TONEX Stomp Parameters85 Advanced Parameters85 Noise Gate86 Compressor87 TONE MODEL88 Reverb89 Brian May90 Red Special90 Treble Booster92 May Wah93 FOX Phaser94 Star Gate95 Dimebag Darrell CFH Collection96 6 Band EQ96 Pre EQ 397 Dime Noise Gate98 Dime Wah99 Flanger Doubler100 Fender®101 Fender® Blender™ 101 Fender® Volume102 Fender® Wah103 Fender® Fuzz Wah104 Fender® Phaser105 Fender® Tremolo106 Fender® ’63 Reverb107 Fender® Tape Echo108 Fender® Compressor109 Fulltone®110 OCD110 Jimi Hendrix111 5 Contents AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models Class Fuzz111 EP Tape Echo112 Fuzz Age113 Fuzz Age 2114 FuzzOne115 Octa-V116 Opto Tremolo117 RightFuzz118 Uni-V119 Wah 46120 XS Fuzz121 Joe Satriani122 Satch Wah122 Satch Distortion123 Satch Overdrive124 Tube Overdrive125 Satch Octave126 Morley®127 Contour Wah127 Oil Can Delay129 Power Wah Fuzz131 Seymour Duncan®132 Power Grid132 Shape Shifter133 Slash134 /Delay134 Booster135 Gate136 OctoBlue137 X-Chorus138 WahDist139 T-Rex®140 Møller 140 Mudhoney141 Replica142 6 Contents AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models Wampler Pedals®143 Nirvana143 Pinnacle Deluxe144 Z.Vex®145 Seek Trem145 Seek Wah146 AmpliTube X-GEAR Appendix147 X-DRIVE Distortion Models147 MODERN147 METAL149 MONARCH151 CAT153 ORANGE155 YELLOW157 GREEN159 DIODE161 BLUE162 BOOSTER164 H-BOOST165 CRUSH166 OCTOFUZZ168 PURPLE170 FUZZACE172 BIG-FUZZ174 X-VIBE Modulation Models176 CHORUS 80176 CHORUS 1178 CHORUS X179 60 VIBE180 PHAZER 9181 PHAZER 10182 PHAZER CL183 FOX184 STONE185 ELECTRIC186 7 Contents AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models DOUBLER187 METALLIC188 ROTARY189 TREMOLO190 STEP SLICER191 STEP FILTER192 X-TIME Delay Models193 VTG TAPE193 MOD TAPE195 ANALOG196 DIGITAL197 PING PONG198 PATTERN199 DUAL200 REVERSE201 REV PONG202 SWELL203 DUCK204 PITCH205 HARM207 DIRTY209 SLAPBACK210 ARCTIC211 X-SPACE Reverb Models212 SHIMMER 1212 SHIMMER 2214 HALL215 ROOM216 CHAMBER217 CHURCH218 PLATE219 SPRING220 SWELL221 GATE222 REVERSE223 8 Contents AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models EARY REF224 EXTREME225 ETHEREAL226 BLOOM227 MAGNETIC228 Amplifiers229 AmpliTube Clean229 American Clean MKIII229 American Tube Clean 1231 American Tube Clean 2232 Custom Solid State Clean233 Jazz Amp 120234 Metal Clean T236 AmpliTube Crunch237 American Tube Vintage237 Brit Valve Pre238 British Blue Tube 30TB239 British Copper 30TB240 HiAmp241 Tube Vintage Combo242 AmpliTube Lead243 American Lead MKIII243 Brit 8000245 Brit 9000246 Brit Silver247 British Tube Lead 1248 British Tube Lead 2249 Custom Modern Hi-Gain250 Custom Solid State Fuzz251 Custom Solid State Lead252 German 34253 MiniPlex 20254 Metal Lead T255 Metal Lead V256 Metal Lead W257 9 Contents AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models Modern Tube Lead258 Red Pig259 SilverPlate 50260 SLD 100261 VHandcraft 4262 Vintage Metal Lead264 AmpliTube Bass265 360Bass Preamp265 Green BA250267 New York B750268 Solid State Bass Preamp269 AmpliTube SVX270 SVX-500270 SVX-15R272 SVX-CL273 SVX-PRO275 SVX-VR277 SVX-4B279 SVX-15N281 AmpliTube TONEX283 Overview283 AmpliTube TONEX Parameters288 Advanced Parameters288 Noise Gate289 Compressor290 Tone Model291 Reverb292 Brian May293 BM 30293 BM DK294 Carvin®295 V3M295 Dimebag Darrell CFH Collection297 Darrell 100297 Jazz Amp 120 CFH298 10 Contents AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models Dr. Z Amplification®299 MAZ 18 Jr.299 Z Wreck300 Engl®301 E650301 Powerball303 Fender®305 ’57 Deluxe305 Pro Junior306 ’64 Vibroverb Custom307 ’65 Deluxe Reverb308 ’65 Twin Reverb309 Super-Sonic310 Vibro-King311 ’59 Bassman312 Bassman 300313 Champion 600315 MH-500 Metalhead316 TBP-1 317 ’65 Princeton319 ’57 Champ320 ’57 Custom Champ321 ’57 Custom Deluxe322 ’57 Custom Twin-Amp323 ’57 Custom Pro-Amp324 ’57 Bandmaster325 ’65 Super Reverb326 ’53 Bassman327 Gallien-Krueger®329 MB 150 S329 Jet City Amplification 333®330 JCA20H330 JCA100H331 Jimi Hendrix332 American Vintage B332 11 Contents AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models American Vintage D333 American Vintage T334 British Lead S100335 JH 1200336 JH Gold337 SilverTwelve338 Joe Satriani339 Satch VM339 SJ50341 Boston 100342 Leslie®343 122343 122A344 147345 3300w346 G37 / Studio12347 Marshall® - Slash348 AFD 100348 JCM Slash349 MESA/Boogie®350 Mark III350 Mark IV352 Dual Rectifier355 Triple Rectifier357 Transatlantic TA-30359 Triple Crown361 Mark IIC+363 Mark V365 California Tweed367 Orange®368 OR-120368 Tiny Terror369 Rockerverb 50370 AD 30371 Thunderverb 200372 12 Contents AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models AD 200374 Dual Terror375 OR 50376 THD®377 THD Bi-Valve377 Cabinets378 AmpliTube Guitar 10"378 4x10 Open Vintage378 AmpliTube Guitar 1x12"379 1x12 Combo379 1x12 MB II380 1x12 MB III381 1x12 Open Modern382 1x12 Open Vintage383 AmpliTube Guitar 2x12"384 2x12 Closed Vintage384 2x12 Gry British Vint385 2x12 JP Jazz386 2x12 Open Vintage387 AmpliTube Guitar 4x10”388 4x10 NY410388 AmpliTube Guitar 4x12”389 4x12 Brit 30389 4x12 Brit 8000390 4x12 Brit 9000391 4x12 Brit Silver392 4x12 Closed Modern393 4x12 Closed Vintage394 4x12 HiAmp395 4x12 Metal F396 4x12 Metal T397 4x12 Metal V398 4x12 Modern M399 4x12 Red Pig400 4x12 Vintage M401 13 Contents AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube Bass402 4x10+tw Bass402 4x10+tw TE Bass403 1x15 Bass Vintage404 1x18 Horn Bass405 Custom IR406 AmpliTube SVX407 1x15 SVX-15R407 2x10 SVX-500408 2x12 SVX-212409 4x10 SVX-410B410 4x10 SVX-410S411 8x10 SVX-810E412 1x15 SVX-115413 2x12 SVX-212 AV414 8x10 SVX-810A415 Brian May416 1x6 BM DK416 2x12 BM 30 Blue417 2x12 BM 30 H70418 Carvin®419 2x12 V3M419 Dimebag Darrell CFH Collection420 2x12 JP Jazz CFH420 4x12 Darrell 412421 Dr. Z Amplification®422 1x12 MAZ 18 Jr.422 2x12 Z Wreck423 ENGL®424 E 412 PRO XXL424 E 412 Standard425 Fender®426 1x12 ’57 Deluxe426 1x10 Pro Junior427 1x15 ’64 Vibroverb Custom428 14 Contents AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models 1x12 ’65 Deluxe Reverb429 2x12 ’65 Twin Reverb430 1x12 Super-Sonic431 3x10 Vibro-King432 4x10 ’59 Bassman433 8x10 Bass 810 PRO434 1x6 Champion 600435 4x12 MH-412SL436 Vibratone437 1x10 ’65 Princeton438 1x8 ’57 Champ439 1x8 ’57 Custom Champ440 1x12 ’57 Custom Deluxe441 2x12 ’57 Custom Twin-Amp442 1x15 ’57 Custom Pro-Amp443 3x10 ’57 Bandmaster444 4x10 ’65 Super Reverb445 1x15 ’53 Bassman446 Gallien-Krueger®447 1x12 MB 150 S447 Jimi Hendrix448 2x12 Open SL448 2x12 Open T J120449 2x15 Closed B J130450 2x15 Closed D J130451 4x12 Closed 25 C452 4x12 Closed 75 C453 4x12 Closed J120454 Joe Satriani455 4x12 Satch 60455 4x12 Satch Green456 Boston Cab Sim457 Leslie®458 122460 122A461 15 Contents AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models 147462 Leslie 3300W463 G37464 Studio 12465 Marshall® - Slash466 4x12 1960AV SL466 4x12 1960BV SL467 MESA/Boogie®468 1x12 Mark III468 1x12 Mark IV469 1x12 California Tweed470 2x12 California Tweed471 2x12 Road King472 2x12 Rectifier Horizontal473 2x12 TransAtlantic TA-30474 4x12 Recto Traditional Slant475 4x12 Road King Vintage476 4x12 Road King Black477 Orange®478 1x12 PPC 112478 1x12 Tiny Terror479 1x15 OBC 115480 2x12 AD 30481 2x12 PPC 212482 2x12 PPC OB483 4x10 OBC 410484 4x12 PPC 412485 8x10 OBC 810486 Microphones487 Dynamic487 Dynamic 57487 Dynamic 20488 Vintage Dynamic 20489 Dynamic 421490 Dynamic 441491 16 Contents AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models Dynamic 609492 Condenser493 Bottle 563493 Condenser 12494 Condenser 67495 Condenser 84496 Condenser 87497 Condenser 170498 Condenser 414499 MD1-b 500 Tube VM501 Ribbon502 Ribbon 121502 Ribbon 160503 Velo-8504 Rack Effects505 AmpliTube Delay & Reverb505 Digital Delay505 Digital Reverb506 Hall Reverb507 Inverse Reverb508 Plate Reverb509 Room Reverb510 Shimmer Reverb511 Tap Delay512 AmpliTube EQ & Dynamics514 Black 76514 EQ 81515 EQ PG516 Graphic EQ517 Model 670518 Parametric EQ519 Parametric EQ 3520 Tube Compressor521 Vintage EQ-1A522 17 Contents AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models White 2A523 AmpliTube Filter524 Filter C524 Filter M525 Filter O526 Filter R527 Filter Formant528 Filter Phaser529 Rezo530 Step Filter532 AmpliTube Modulation534 AM Modulator534 Analog Chorus535 Auto Pan536 Digital Chorus537 Digital Flanger538 FM Modulator539 Rotary Speaker540 AmpliTube Pitch541 Harmonator541 Pitch Shifter543 AmpliTube Other544 Saturator-X544 Step Slicer545 Stereo Enhancer547 Swell548 Tape Cassette549 Fender®550 Pitch Shift 550 Sine Flange 551 Tape Echo552 Triangle Chorus553 Wah 554 Compressor 555 Fender® ‘63 Reverb 556 18 Contents AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models Fulltone®557 TERC - That 80’s Rack Chorus! 557 Legal559 19 Contents Gear Models AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube Delay Delay This model is based on a traditional digital delay stomp pedal. Controls: • • • • 20 DELAY: changes the length of the delay between each echo, from 1 ms to 2000 ms. FBK: changes the amount of time that the echo repeats, from 0% to 100%. LEVEL: sets the level of the effected (or wet) sound, from 0 to 10. BPM SYNC: allows the effect to synchronize to the project tempo. Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models EchoMan Based on Electro Harmonix® Memory Man™ A model of a classic bucket-brigade analog echo/delay (with modulation) stomp pedal effect. Controls: • • • • • • 21 DELAY: changes the length of the delay between each echo, from 25 ms to 500 ms. FEEDBACK: changes the amount of time that the echo repeats, from 0% to 100%. BLEND: mixes the amount of dry signal with the effected signal, from 0% (dry) to 100% (effected). CH/VIB: sets the amount of Chorus/Vibrato effect added to the effected sound, from 0% to 100%. CHORUS VIBRATO: changes whether chorus or vibrato can be added to the effect. BPM SYNC: allows the effect to synchronize to the project tempo. Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models TapDelay This creative delay effect unit can be used to create interesting and unusual delay effects thanks to the 8 totally independent taps. You can create grooving rhythm patterns by combining more taps with a specific time signature, and you can mix this up with psychedelic reverse tape effects you are able to set for each tap. The TapDelay is actually 8 delays in one single unit, and it is possible to set time, timbre, and level for each of them. In addition, you can globally control with single knobs parameters for all the 8 taps simultaneously, like time, dry/wet mix and feedback amount. Controls: • TIME: globally shifts the delay time of all the 8 taps. This is a relative control, when set at the center position (1x) it does not alter the time that has been setup on each Tap, when set to minimum (0.25x) it divides all times by four and when set to max (4x) it multiply all times by four. Use it to globally change the delay tempo without changing the relations between all taps. • MIX: globally adjust the effect mix between the Dry signal and all the 8 delay taps. • FEEDBACK: globally adjust the amount of feedback the delay will have. When set at maximum, the delay will be sustaining itself. • TAP: use these buttons to select which one among the 8 delay taps you’re going to edit with next controls • LEVEL: sets the audio level for the selected delay tap. • TIME: sets the delay time for the selected tap. It can be shown in milliseconds or in musical divisions, 22 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop • • • • 23 Gear Models depending on the BPM Sync switch position. FILTER: sets the timbre for the selected delay tap, darker at minimum and brighter at maximum. REVERSE: enable this button to transform the selected delay tap from normal to reverse. When set to reverse a delay tap will sound like a reversed tape loop. LINK: enable this button to make a changes to the above mentioned parameters to apply to all the 8 taps at the same time. BPM SYNC: allows the effect to synchronize to the project tempo. Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube Distortion AmpLess Based on Tech 21® Sansamp™ This American piece of gear really changed bass tones for decades. Used by bassists of all genres for its huge versatility, it provides vintage tones, bright and modern sounds to cut through mixes, edgy distortions and everything in between. Chances are that you saw this stomp in one or more of your favorite bassists’ rigs to drive a DI, to go direct into the PA or simply to add grit to the sound. Controls: • BASS & TREBLE: Unlike passive controls that only cut, these active tone controls cut or boost ±12dB from unity gain (12 o’clock). This powerful EQ section effectively reduces the need for a fixed frequency mid control and enables you to achieve an extensive variety of curves including a “mid-cut” as well as a “mid-boost.” • PRESENCE: brings out the upper harmonic content and attack. For a smoother high end and for clean settings, decrease to taste. • BLEND allows you to blend the direct instrument signal with an amplifier emulation circuitry. In most cases, you will probably have this set at maximum (100% wet). For certain applications, however, such as an ultratransparent sound or for use with piezo pickup-equipped instruments, you may want to blend-in the direct signal to achieve your desired sound. While the amplifier emulation circuitry is bypassed when Blend is at minimum, the Bass, Treble and Level controls remain active. 24 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • LEVEL: adjusts the output level. • DRIVE: adjusts the overall amount of gain and overdrive, similar to when the output section of a tube amp is being pushed. 25 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models BigPig Based on Electro Harmonix® Big Muff Pi™ This effect is modeled after an iconic distortion pedal that has stood the test of time. Capable of tones from smooth sustain & compression to heavy buzz-saw distortion, this pedal is perfect for all different styles of metal. Controls: • VOLUME: controls the Distortion pedal output level. It does not alter the timbre of the distortion, unless another distorting device follow, like another distortion pedal or an amplifier at high gain or volume. • SUSTAIN: controls the amount of distortion the pedal gives. • TONE: controls the timbre of the distortion pedal 26 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Crusher This model alters the sound of the input signal by changing the sample-rate, cutoff frequency and by distorting it. This effect can produce very aggressive distorted sounds, more noticeable than overdrive stompboxes. The Low pass filter is very creative when combined to high distortion levels. Controls: • CUTOFF: controls the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter. • DECIM: selects the sample-rate-ratio of the processed sound, from 1:1 to 1:16. • GAIN: sets the amount of signal sent to the effect, therefore the distortion. Useful when creating heavily distorted sounds, from -40 dB to +40 dB. • OUT: controls the output volume, from -40 dB to +40 dB. 27 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Diode Overdrive A model of a classic overdrive stomp effect Controls: • TONE: adjusts boost or cut of the high frequencies in the stomp effect, from 0 to 10. • DIST: sets the amount of distortion applied to the input signal of the effect, from 0 to 10. • LEVEL: sets the level of the input for the effect, from 0 to 10. 28 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Distortion Based on Boss® DS-1™ Distortion This effect is based on one of the most versatile distortion boxes ever made. From subtle crunch to complete mayhem, this pedal has been used by countless guitarists of all styles. Controls: • LEVEL: controls the Distortion pedal output level. It does not alter the timbre of the distortion, unless another distorting device follows, like another distortion pedal or an amplifier at high gain or volume. • DIST: controls the amount of distortion the pedal gives. • TONE: controls the timbre of the distortion pedal. 29 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Feedback Based on Boss® DF-2™ Super feedbacker & Distortion This effect, modeled after a hard-to-find vintage unit, includes a built-in oscillator for infinite sustain. Hold notes to create amazing synth-like sounds or boost solos for more cutting tone, combined with classic distortion timbres. Controls: • LEVEL: controls the Distortion pedal output level. It does not alter the timbre of the distortion, unless another distorting device follow, like another distortion pedal or an amplifier at high gain or volume. • TONE: controls the timbre of the distortion pedal. • DIST: controls the amount of distortion the pedal gives. • OVERTONE: controls the octave for the feedback effect. • FBK switch: press this button to activate the feedback. Notes: • When the stomp is On, clicking on the FBK button will make the led flash. • When using StompIO, feedback will be automatically activated when distortion is On, and the On/Off button for this pedal is hold down for 1 second or more. 30 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Metal Distortion Based on Boss® MT-2™ Metal Zone This effect is based on one of the favorite pedals of some of the heaviest bands of all time. This unit is perfect for extreme gain and sustain. Nothing compares to this pedal for pure distortion mayhem. Controls: • LEVEL: controls the Distortion pedal output level. It does not alter the timbre of the distortion, unless another distorting device follows, like another distortion pedal or an amplifier at high gain or volume. • DIST: controls the amount of distortion the pedal gives. • LOW – HIGH: coaxial tone control. • Center knob: controls High frequencies. • External knob: controls Low frequencies. • MID – MIDFREQ: coaxial parametric mid tone control. • Center knob: controls Mids level. • External knob: controls Mids frequency. 31 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Metal Distortion 2 Based on Boss® HM-2™ Heavy Metal This effect is modeled after a classic from the ‘80s. It delivers deep, distorted crunch perfect for heavy metal and hard rock. Long discontinued, this is a rare vintage find that delivers deep, dark crunch from the ‘70s, ‘80s, and beyond. Controls: • LEVEL: controls the distortion pedal output level. It does not alter the timbre of the distortion, unless another distorting device follows, like another distortion pedal or an amplifier at high gain or volume. • DIST: controls the amount of distortion the pedal gives. • COLOR L: controls the amount of bass tones on the sound. • COLOR H: controls the amount of high tones on the sound. 32 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Overdrive Based on Boss® SD-1™ Super OverDrive This effect is based on one of the most collectible pedals. It is one of the most aggressive overdrive pedals ever made. From subtle to over-the-top, this effect pushes amps harder without sacrificing clarity and tone. Controls: • LEVEL: controls the Overdrive pedal output level. It does not alter the timbre of the distortion, unless another distorting device follows, like another distortion pedal or an amplifier at high gain or volume. • DRIVE: controls the amount of overdrive the pedal gives. • TONE: controls the timbre of the overdrive pedal. 33 Stomp Box Effects Gear Models AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop OverScream Based on Ibanez® Tube Screamer® TS-9™ This is a model of a classic overdrive/distortion pedal which has become the go to overdrive pedal for some of the most influential guitar players of all time. Its basic controls make it easy to dial in the exact sound you want. Controls: • OVERDRIVE: increases the amount of clipping in the distortion circuit, from 0 to 10. • LEVEL: sets the output level of the pedal, from 0 to 10. • TONE: adjusts boost or cut of high frequencies in the stomp effect, from 0 to 10. 34 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models PROdrive Based on Pro Co RAT™ Distortion This effect is modeled after one of the most versatile distortion boxes ever. From smooth, light crunch, to extreme shred sustain and over-the-top gain, this pedal has been a classic ever since its release in the early ‘80s. Controls: • DISTORTION: controls the amount of distortion the pedal gives. • VOLUME: controls the PROdrive pedal output level. It does not alter the timbre of the distortion. • FILTER: controls the timbre of the PROdrive pedal. 35 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models The Ambass’dor Based on Marshall® Guv’Nor™ This pedal is a model of a beloved ‘80s-era distortion pedal by a company known for making amps with amazing distortion. This model packs a whole powerful amp into a single stomp box. Controls: • • • • • 36 GAIN: sets the amount of distortion generated by the pedal. BASS: sets the amount of low frequencies in the sound. MIDDLE: sets the amount of midrange frequencies in the sound. TREBLE: sets the amount of high frequencies in the sound. LEVEL: sets the output volume of the distortion pedal. Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models VariDiode+ Based on MXR® Distortion+ with interchangeable diodes This modded model is perfect to pump up your sound from light overdrives to dense distortions. Famous for its mods, we’ve reproduced three different clipping stages: stock germanium diodes 1N270, the 1n4148 diodes and LEDs with the ability to switch between the three in real time. Controls: • • • • 37 GAIN: sets the amount of distortion generated by the pedal. OUTPUT: controls the overall volume of the effect. DIST: sets the amount of distortion generated by the pedal. DIODES: they are the most important factor for the distortion sound signature. ∙ 1n270: these are the original germanium diodes thought for the circuit, they are the fuzzier ones. ∙ 1n4148: silicon diodes offering a tighter sound than the germanium, but also harsher when pushed into clipping. ∙ Leds: the third option are leds offering a fatter sound compared to the germanium diodes. Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube Dynamics Compressor This effect is a model of a classic high-end compressor. It is capable of mild compression or intense signal slamming, and does it all with a tremendous amount of finesse. Controls: • COMP: sets the amount of compression, from 0 to 100. • LEVEL: changes the output level of the compressor, from -15 dB to +15 dB. 38 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Dcomp Based on MXR® Dynacomp™ This effect is modeled after a vintage compression stomp pedal. Controls: • OUTPUT: sets the output level for the effect, from –inf to 0.0 dB. • SENSITIVITY: sets the sensitivity of the compression, from 0 to 10. 39 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Noise Gate This pedal replicates the noise gate that was embedded in the bottom bar of AmpliTube 4. It’s a simple and easy to use Noise Gate to clean up your tones. Controls: • THRESHOLD: This sets the threshold level for the signal. When the signal drops below the set threshold level, the noise gate silences the signal. Usually, keep the threshold level at the lowest possible value (fully counterclockwise) and set it higher only when you need to activate the gate. • RELEASE: It sets the gate release time. Higher values will result in a gate that takes a longer amount of time to close again, when the input signal drops below the threshold. • DEPTH: This control determines how much the signal is attenuated when the gate closes, from -20 dB to -100 dB. Default is -60 dB, which is a strong attenuation that usually works fine in most cases. If you need to add more attenuation, increase this parameter. 40 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube EQ 7 Band Graphic This model is a clean, highly effective 1 octave graphic equalizer, capable of fine tuning and dialing in that perfect tone. It is also very useful when you need to “push” the signal for the next stompbox or amp. Controls: • FREQUENCY BAND LEVEL: each frequency band is one octave apart and allows for +/- 15 dB of adjustment. The controls include 100 Hz, 200 Hz, 400 Hz, 800 Hz, 1.6 kHz, 3.2 kHz, 6.4 kHz. • LEVEL: sets the output level of the graphic EQ, from -15 dB to +15 dB. 41 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 10 Band Graphic IK Multimedia proprietary 10 Band Graphic EQ. Controls: • BANDS: 31, 62, 125, 250, 500, 1k, 2k, 4k, 8k, 16k. Each band has +/- 15 dB of boost/cut. • GAIN: the gain slider boosts or cut the overall level by +/- 15 dB. 42 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube Filter Envelope Filter This stomp is an advanced filter effect. It uses the envelope of the incoming signal to control a synthesizer style filter. It is capable of sounds ranging from very simple auto wah effects to extreme never before heard filtering effects. Controls: • • • • 43 FREQ: sets the cutoff frequency of the filter, from 40 Hz to 20,480 Hz. RES: sets the resonance of the filter, from 0.30 to 10. DEPTH: changes the amount of effect that the envelope has on the filter, from 0% to 100%. MODE: these control change the type of filter used for the effect. ∙ 12/24: sets the slope of the filter, either 12 dB per octave or 24 dB per octave. ∙ HP/BP/LP: sets the type of filter being used, either high pass, band pass, or low pass. Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models LFO Filter This complex stomp effect uses an LFO to modulate the frequency of its filter. With the included BPM Sync this is a very useful effect for creating interesting, moving guitar parts with a minimum amount of trouble. Controls: FREQ: sets the cutoff frequency of the filter, from 40 Hz to 20,480 Hz. RESO: sets the resonance of the filter, from 0.30 to 10. RATE: adjusts the speed of the LFO, from 0.05 Hz to 5 Hz. DEPTH: changes the amount of effect that the envelope has on the filter from 0% to 100%. MODE: these control change the type of filter used for the effect. ∙ 12/24: sets the slope of the filter, either 12 dB per octave or 24 dB per octave. ∙ HP/BP/LP: sets the type of filter being used, either high pass, band pass, or low pass. • BPM SYNC: allows the effect to synchronize to the project tempo. • • • • • 44 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Rezo A unique effect that can add synth-like drones and sustaining resonances to your parts. Make your guitar sound like a sitar or like a synth-drone to create sonic resonances to sing on and control the notes with your controller to create arpeggios and steps while playing. You have 4 resonating voices that can be tuned independently from note E0 to note B7, in half tone steps. For example, if you want to create a resonating C Major chord, just set the first three voices to C3, E3 and G3. By moving the All slider you can shift the recently created Chord without changing the intervals between the voices. You can set the desired voice note by note number or by frequency in Hz. Controls: • 1-4 SLIDERS: sets the pitch for each resonating voice. • 1-4 VALUE DISPLAY: displays which note each voice is tuned on. • NOTE/FREQUENCY SWITCH: turn On this switch to have the tuning of each voice displayed as a note. Turn this Off to have the tuning of each voice to be displayed as frequency in Hz. • ALL: shifts all resonating notes by the same amount keeping relative intervals between voices identical. • RES: sets the amount of resonance for each voice, from min to max. When set to max the note will sustain by itself, when set to min the voice will not be resonating • SCALE: the Rezo is setup by default to span over a chromatic scale when you set the resonating voices, meaning that all half tones are possible. If you want to set another scale and want to remove notes from the chromatic scale just open this menu and leave on only the notes you need. • FILTER: determines the brightness of the resonating voices, from dark (lower positions) to bright (upper positions). 45 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • MIX: sets the amount of resonating notes you want to hear. When the control is at min you’ll only hear the original sound, when fully up you’ll only hear the effected sound. • OUT: the resonating notes can become very loud. Use this control to adjust the overall output level of the Rezonator. 46 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Step Filter A powerful and deep beat synchronized filter effect. You can apply Low/High and Band pass analog modeled filtering on freely customizable patterns to add groove and rhythmic pulsing to your parts. If you want, this effect could make your guitars and bass parts to sound like a rhythmic synth. Controls: • CUTOFF: sets the center cutoff frequency of the filter. This is the cutoff frequency the filter will have when the steps are set to half position. • STEP BAR: click on the Steps to set each step level. You can also draw a curve while holding the mouse while dragging over multiple steps. • RES: sets the center resonance of the filter. This is the resonance amount the filter will have when the steps are set to half position. • DEPTH: sets how deep the filter is modulated by the steps. • HP/BP/LP: sets which kind of filter will be used: HP: high pass, BP: band pass, LP: low pass. • 12/24: sets the steepness of the filter, 12 dB/oct will be softer, 24 dB/oct will be steeper. • DEST: sets what is modulated by the steps between filter Cutoff and/or filter Resonance. At full minimum position only Cutoff frequency is modulated, at max position only Resonance is modulated. • DIVISION: sets what time interval each step represents. • STEPS: sets the number of steps the cycle will consist of. • MODE: when set to Free the cycle will be continuous and will always cover all the steps that are specified in the Steps parameter. When set to Strike the cycle will re-start each time a chord or a note is played. 47 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • SWING: increase this control to give to the steps a swing type quantization. • BPM SYNC: allows the effect to synchronize to the project tempo. 48 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Wah This effect is modeled after the classic wah pedal used by many of the top players from the ‘60s and ‘70s. In addition to the wah effect it also features an auto function, allowing it to be used easily without an external controller. Controls: • OFF/ON/AUTO: sets the mode of the Wah effect, Off, On, or Auto. • WAHWAH: this directly controls the Wah effect, from 0% to 100%. 49 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Wah 10 Based on Ibanez® WH-10™ This is a faithful rendition of a very sought-after wah pedal. Based on a multiple feedback opamp circuit, the pedal modeled here is a very expressive and unique wah pedal. Controls: • WAH: sets the position of the wah pedal. It gives a darker sound when moved lower (heel position) and a brighter sound when moved higher (toe position). • DEPTH: determines how strong the wah effect is. When is set at minimum the wah effect is barely noticeable, but when is set to max the effect is very strong. • GUITAR/BASS SWITCH: modify the response of the wah to make it more suitable to guitar or bass. 50 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Wah 47 Based on Vox® Wah V847™ This effect is based on the Wah pedal used by the most influential guitarists of the late ‘60s and ‘70s. The Auto function allows you to use this effect without an external controller. This is a great feature! Controls: • OFF/ON/AUTO: sets the mode of the Wah effect, Off, On, or Auto. • WAHWAH: this directly controls the wah effect, from 0% to 100%. 51 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Nu-Tron III Based on Musitronics® Mu-Tron™ III This stomp box effect is based on the patented automatic wah device from 1972 that became famous through its use with keyboards. Filters allowed for low-pass, bandpass, and high-pass filter response which could be triggered from low to high frequency or vice versa. Controls: • MODE: switch between the type of filter: LP (lowpass, filters high frequencies), BP (bandpass, filters both low and high frequencies) and HP (highpass, filters low frequencies). • PEAK: sets the amount of resonant emphasis at the cutoff frequency of the filter. • GAIN: adjusts the input level to the effect. • RANGE: determines whether the cutoff frequency of the filter is set to a low frequency or a high frequency. • DRIVE: determines whether the filter sweeps from low to high (filter opening) or from high to low (filter closing). 52 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube Modulation Analog Flanger Based on Boss® BF-2™ Flanger This effect is based on one of the most flexible flangers ever made. This unit delivers everything from classic tape flange to over-the-top sweeps, vibratos, chorus, and more! Perfect for adding classic metal-style flange to your rig. Controls: • MANUAL: sets the timbre of the flanging effect. • DEPTH: sets the amount of modulation the LFO will apply to the flanging effect. If Depth is zero, you’ll get a “static” flanging effect. • RATE: sets the speed of the LFO modulation that will be applied to the flanging effect. • RES: sets the resonance the flanger effect will produce. 53 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Chorus This chorus is modeled after a classic Digital Chorus stomp box. Controls: • • • • 54 RATE: sets the rate of the chorus effect, from 0 to 10. DEPTH: sets the intensity of the chorus effect, from 0 to 10. LEVEL: sets the input level of the stomp effect, ranges from 0 to 10. BPM SYNC: allows the effect to synchronize to the project tempo. Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Chorus-1 Based on Boss® CE-1™ Chorus A model of a classic bucket-brigade analog Chorus/Vibrato unit. It provides both analog Chorus and analog Vibrato effects, when in Chorus mode the modulation will be lush and slow, when in Vibrato effect the modulation will be faster and more noticeable. Controls: LEVEL: sets the input level. Range is from –15 dB to +15 dB. CHORUS: sets the intensity (or depth) of the Chorus effect, from 0 to 10. VIBRATO DEPTH: sets the intensity of the Vibrato effect, from 0 to 10. VIBRATO RATE: sets the rate of the Vibrato effect, from 0 to 10. VIBRATO/CHORUS SWITCH: enables Vibrato or Chorus modes, when Vibrato mode is enabled the corresponding LED will illuminate. • BPM SYNC: allows the effect to synchronize to the project tempo. • • • • • 55 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Electric Flanger Based on Electro-Harmonix® Electric Mistress™ This stomp box is a model of a vintage flanger/filter matrix used by many well-known guitarists to achieve classic sounds. While it has amazing warmth, it is also capable of very versatile chorus and steady comb filtering/matrix that can imprint a very specific sonic signature to the sound. Controls: • RATE: controls the speed of the effect, from slow to fast. • RANGE: sets the deepness of the effect, from subtle to very strong • COLOR: sets the amount of feedback in the flanger circuit, delivering a more intense effect when set at max. • MANUAL: this is normally set to the lower position, when set at the upper position it stops the LFO. This means that you can use the effect to have static resonance and filter matrix effects. Adjust the timbre of the resonance and filters by setting the Range knob, and adjust the intensity of the resonances by setting the Color knob. • ON/OFF: enables or disables the effect. When the effect is on the red LED is light. • BPM SYNC: makes the rate of the phasing effect to be synchronized with the BPM of the project. When enabled, the Rate knob becomes a selector that allows you to choose between various musical figures. 56 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Flanger This stomp box is a model of a classic Flanger effect. Controls: • • • • • 57 RATE: sets the rate of the Flanger effect, from 0 to 10. DEPTH: sets the intensity of the Flanger, from 0 to 10. FBK: sets a delay for the Flanger to take effect, from 0 to 10. LEVEL: sets the input level of the stomp box, ranges from 0 to 10. BPM SYNC: allows the effect to synchronize to the project tempo. Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Metal Flanger Based on MXR® Flanger 117 This effect is modeled after one of the best and most musical modulation effects ever. A classic association with an iconic ‘80s guitarist made prices erupts and flooded the market with reissues. Still, no flanger is more recognizable, making this perfect for hard-rock and metal tone. Controls: • MANUAL: sets the timbre of the flanging effect. • WIDTH: sets the amount of modulation the LFO will apply to the flangἀing effect. If Width is zero, you’ll get a “static” flanging effect. • SPEED: controls the amount of high tones on the sound. • REGEN: sets the amount of feedback the internal flanger effect will have. 58 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Phaze Nine Based on MXR® Phase 90™ This effect is based on one of the most popular phase pedals of all times. Used by a wide range of first-class guitarists, this unit could add a little bit of shimmer to your solos or generate a smooth, watery effect while playing chords and muted strumming. Did you try the Phaze Nine on bass, keyboards, or vocals? Controls: • SPEED: controls the phase LFO rate. 59 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Phazer 10 Based on MXR® Phase 100™ A model of a classic analog multimode Phaser stomp box. Controls: • INTENSITY: selects one of the four different Phaser modes. From left to right the perceived effect intensity will increase. • SPEED: sets the speed of the modulation, from 0 to 10. 60 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Small Phazer Based on Electro-Harmonix® Small Stone™ This effect is a model of a classic analog phase shifter, capable of a range of phaser effects from gentle to outlandish swirling effects. You may wonder why it is called “small” when you hear it. Controls: • RATE: controls the speed of the effect, from slow to fast. • COLOR: set it to the lower position for a more gentle phasing effect, or set it at the upper position for a more pronounced and deep phasing effect. • BPM SYNC: makes the rate of the phasing effect to be synchronized with the BPM of the project. When enabled the rate knob becomes a selector that allows to choose between various musical figures. 61 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube Pitch Harmonator This effect is a 3 voice digital harmonizer effect. More than just a pitch shifter, this pedal will create 3 separate harmony voices with independent interval values based on a musical scale. Simply select the scale to use, select the voice and the desired pitch and play. The harmonized notes will be according to the selected scale. Controls: • MIX: blends the harmonized voice with the original voice, from 0 to 100. • KEY-SCALE: controls the key and type of scale that will be used by the harmonizer as a reference. If you’re playing a solo in E major set this to E Major. Possible scales types are: Major, Dorian, Phrygian, Lydian, Mixolydian, Minor, and Locrian. • VOICE: controls the properties of each of the 3 voices of the harmonizer. • LEVEL: independently adjusts the level of each of the 3 voices. • 1: selects voice 1 for editing. • 2: selects voice 2 for editing. • 3: selects voice 3 for editing. • INTERVAL: changes the interval of the selected voice, from octave down to octave up. 62 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Octav Based on Boss® OC-2™ Octaver This stomp effect is modeled after a classic dual voice octave pedal. It will produce two additional sounds, one and two octaves below the direct signal. Controls: • OCT 2: sets the output level of the second octave effect, from –inf to 0.00 dB. • OCT 1: sets the output level of the first octave effect, from –inf to 0.00 dB. • DIRECT LEVEL: sets the output level of the direct signal, from –inf to 0.00 dB. 63 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Pitch Shifter This effect shifts the pitch of the incoming signal. This new pitch shifted signal is blended with the original sound to create harmony guitar leads or other types of dual pitch effects. Controls: • COARSE: sets the coarse tuning of the pitch shifter. Measured in intervals, from -24 to 24. • FINE: sets the fine tuning of the pitch shifter. Measured in cents, from -50 to 50. • LEVEL: sets the output level of the pitch shifted sound, from 0 to 10. 64 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Wharmonator Based on Digitech® Wahmmy™ WH-1™ This effect is modeled after one of the most extreme effects of all time. From classic shred to the most aggressive modern metal, this effect is an essential part of any extreme guitar rig. Controls: • • • • • 65 HARM knob: sets the harmonic interval range you can span with the action of the pedal. BEND knob: sets the bending range you can span with the action of the pedal. MODE: sets the Wharmonator operating mode. HARM: this mode gives both original and pitched signal mixed together, useful to create harmonies. BEND: this mode only gives the pitched signal, useful to create great bending effects Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube Other Acoustic Sim Turn your electric guitar into an acoustic guitar with the Acoustic Sim! Mix three guitar body styles with three types of top end to dial in your acoustic sound. Equalize the result with a 2-band post EQ. Controls: • SOURCE: select the type of pickup you are using: single coil or humbucker. • BODY: choose between three types of acoustic guitar bodies: 1: dreadnought body. 2: 12-string guitar body. 3: Classical guitar body. • TOP: choose between three types of top end response. Although types A, B, C have originally been designed to match their respective 1, 2, 3, bodies, you can experiment with any cross combination. • MIX: mixes the acoustic sound with the magnetic pickup sound. When Mix is set to 0, you get a filtered version of your dry signal, without any body and top end applied. When Mix is set to 10, you get the acoustic sound only. Turn Mix from 10 downwards to progressively add the mid frequencies of the magnetic pickup. • BASS: increases/decreases overall bass frequencies. • TREBLE: increases/decreases overall treble frequencies. IMPORTANT: In order to obtain a satisfying acoustic sound, you should bypass the amp and cabinet sections by pressing the power icon on these two sections. 66 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Step Slicer Add programmed rhythmic parts to your power chords and phrases with this powerful and creative beat synced slicing effect. It can be setup to create anything from the most amazing tremolos to the most complex rhythm effects that always stay in perfect sync with the beat. Controls: • LEVEL: sets the amount of level modulation the steps will give. At min position the steps will not have effect, at maximum the range will be full. • STEP BAR: click on the Steps to set each step level. You can also draw a curve while holding the mouse while dragging over multiple steps. • RAMP: sets the steepness of the level change between steps. Set it at lower positions to get a more gatelike effect or set it to higher positions to get a smoother effect. • DIVISION: sets what time interval each step represent. • STEPS: sets the number of steps the cycle will consist of. • MODE: When set to Free the cycle will be continuous and will always cover all the steps that are specified in the Steps parameter. When set to Strike the cycle will re-start each time a chord or a note is played. • SWING: increase this control to give to the steps a swing type quantization. • BPM SYNC: allows the effect to synchronize to the project tempo. 67 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Swell This is an “auto volume” swell processor that can automatically create fantastic swell effects while playing without any manual intervention. Use it subtly to add groove to your rhythm parts or use it with deeper settings to create dreaming pads or string-like sounds. Controls: • DEPTH: sets the depth of the volume swell, in dB. By default the depth is at max position, meaning that the volume will start from silence. By lowering this control you’ll make the effect to start the swell phase from a level which is higher than silence, up to min position that makes the effect to have no action. • SENS: this control sets the sensitivity for the Swell to recognize a new note or chord and therefore start a new Swell cycle. Set it higher if you want the Swell cycle to start even at the beginning of softer passages, or set it lower if you want the Swell cycle to only start for louder strikes. • TIME: sets the length of the Swell cycle. During the Swell cycle (time the swell takes to “open” the power LED becomes red (it is normally green). This helps to immediately recognize when the swell is triggered. • BPM SYNC: allows the effect to synchronize to the project tempo making the swell time to be specified in musical figures. 68 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Volume This model is a traditional volume pedal. Controls: • MIN: sets the minimum volume level for the pedal, from 0 to 10. • VOLUME: adjusts the volume of the signal passing through it, from 0% to 100%. 69 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube SVX SVX-OD Based on Ampeg® SCP-OD Overdrive® Model This virtual stomp effect emulates the Ampeg SCP-OD Overdrive pedal. It recreates the original distortion circuit, adding upper octave harmonic content to the direct signal and creating as a result a unique overdrive effect. Controls: • Texture: controls the upper octave harmonic content (or type of distortion) from 0 to 10. • Balance: controls the mix between the direct and overdriven signal, from 0 to 10. • On/Off: turns the Stomp effect On or Off. 70 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models SVX-OCT Based on Ampeg® SCP-OCT Octaver® Model This stomp effect is modeled after the Ampeg SPC-OCT Octaver pedal. Moving the octave knob will double your direct signal one octave below the direct signal. In this way you can make your melodic lines richer and fuller, expanding the frequency range. Controls: • Direct: sets the output level of the direct signal from 0 to 10. • Octave: sets the output level of the sub-octave from 0 to 10. • On/Off: turns the Stomp effect On or Off. 71 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Analog Chorus A model of a classic analog Chorus/Vibrato unit provides both analog Chorus and analog Vibrato effects. When in Chorus mode the modulation will be lush and slow. When in Vibrato effect the modulation will be faster and more noticeable. Controls: Level: sets the input level. Range is from –15dB to +15 dB. Chorus: sets the intensity (or depth) of the Chorus effect from 0 to 10. Vibrato Rate (“vib rate”): sets the rate of the Vibrato effect from 0 to 10. Vibrato Depth(“vib depth”): sets the intensity of the Vibrato effect from 0 to 10. Vibrato/Chorus switch (“vib”/“ch”): enables Vibrato or Chorus modes. When Vibrato mode is enabled the corresponding LED will light up. • On/Off: turns the Stomp effect On or Off. • • • • • 72 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Analog Delay This model is based on a classic analog delay with modulation stomp pedal. Controls: Delay: changes the length of the delay between each echo from 25ms to 500ms. Feedback (“f-back”): changes the amount of time that the echo repeats from 0% to 100%. Blend: mixes the amount of the dry signal with the delayed sound from 0% to 100%. Chorus/Vibrato (“chrs/vib”): sets the amount of Chorus/Vibrato effect added to the processed signal from 0% to 100%. • Vibrato/Chorus switch: enables Vibrato or Chorus modes. • On/Off: turns the Stomp effect On or Off. • BPM Sync ON/OFF: allows the effect to be synchronized to the host BPM. • • • • 73 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Bass Wah This effect is modeled after the classic Wah pedal used by many of the top players from the 60’s and 70’s. In addition to the Wah effect, there is a new exciting feature called “auto”. This option will produce the Wah effect automatically, meaning that there is no need for the manual intervention on the pedal position. Controls: • Off/On/Auto switch: sets the mode of the Wah effect, OFF, ON, or AUTO. • Pedal Position: controls the Wah effect from 0 to 100%. 74 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models SVX Compressor This effect is modeled after a vintage compression stomp pedal and can deliver a strong sustain and powerful compression with lots of character. Controls: • Output: sets the output level for the effect from –inf to 0.00 dB. • Sensitivity: sets the sensitivity of the compression from 0 to 10. • On/Off: sets the mode of the virtual pedal. 75 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models SVX Envelope Filter This stomp is a highly developed filter effect. Essentially, it uses the envelope of the incoming signal to control a synthesizer style filter. The sound palette’s range of this virtual unit is wide and rich. You can enhance your bass tone adding from simple auto Wah effects to extreme filtering effects. Controls: Frequency (“freq”): sets the cutoff frequency of the filter from 40 Hz to 20,480 Hz. Resonance (“reso”): sets the resonance of the filter from 0.30 to 10. Depth: changes the amount of effect that the envelope has on the filter from 0% to 100%. Band pass (“bp”), Low pass (“lp”), High pass (“hp”): sets the type of filter being used, either band pass, low pass or high pass. • 12/24: toggles between 2 and 4 pole filter. • On/Off: sets the mode of the virtual pedal. • • • • 76 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models SVX Volume This is a virtual stomp that emulates a traditional volume pedal. Controls: • Minimum (“min”): sets the minimum volume when the pedal is fully down. The range goes from 0 to 10. • Pedal Position: controls the volume effect from 0 to 100%. 77 Stomp Box Effects Gear Models AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop AmpliTube X-GEAR AmpliTube X-DRIVE Bring your perfect X-GEAR guitar sound onstage in AmpliTube with the new AmpliTube X-DRIVE distortion pedal. This boutique pedal features 16 all-new overdrive and distortion effects leveraging IK’s latest AmpliTube technologies. 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 Controls: 1. PRESET DISPLAY: This display shows the current loaded preset. Click it to choose a different preset (the presets are organized by models). To save or delete the current preset click this display and choose SAVE/DELETE. 2. PRESET: This knob lets you browse among X-DRIVE presets. 3. MODEL: This knob lets you browse among X-DRIVE models. To see the full model’s description refer to the AmpliTube X-GEAR Appendix. 4. MODEL DISPLAY: This display shows the current loaded model. Click it to choose a different model. 5. PARAMETERS: Use these knobs to tweak the selected model. Additional parameter pages are available by clicking on the dots over the X-DRIVE label. To see the full parameter list for each model refer to the AmpliTube X-GEAR Appendix. 6. ON: Use this button to activate or bypass the pedal. 7. X-MODE: Use this button to activate the X-MODE for the selected model. To see the X-MODE description for each model refer to the AmpliTube X-GEAR Appendix. 78 Stomp Box Effects Gear Models AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop AmpliTube X-VIBE Bring your perfect X-GEAR guitar sound onstage in AmpliTube with the new AmpliTube X-VIBE modulation pedal. This boutique, true stereo pedal features 16 all-new delay effects leveraging IK’s latest AmpliTube technologies. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Controls: 1. PRESET DISPLAY: This display shows the current loaded preset. Click it to choose a different preset (the presets are organized by models). To save or delete the current preset click this display and choose SAVE/DELETE. 2. PRESET: This knob lets you browse among X-VIBE presets. 3. MODEL: This knob lets you browse among X-VIBE models. To see the full model’s description refer to the AmpliTube X-GEAR Appendix. 4. MODEL DISPLAY: This display shows the current loaded model. Click it to choose a different model. 5. PARAMETERS: Use these knobs to tweak the selected model. Additional parameter pages are available by clicking on the dots over the X-VIBE label. To see the full parameter list for each model refer to the AmpliTube X-GEAR Appendix. 6. ON: Use this button to activate or bypass the pedal. 7. X-MODE: Use this button to activate the X-MODE for the selected model. To see the X-MODE description for each model refer to the AmpliTube X-GEAR Appendix. 8. BPM: Use this button to sync X-VIBE to the global BPM of the project. The SPEED parameter will be expressed in Time Signatures. 79 Stomp Box Effects Gear Models AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop AmpliTube X-TIME Bring your perfect X-GEAR guitar sound onstage in AmpliTube with the new AmpliTube X-TIME delay pedal. This boutique, true stereo pedal features 16 all-new delay effects leveraging IK’s latest AmpliTube technologies. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Controls: 1. PRESET DISPLAY: This display shows the current loaded preset. Click it to choose a different preset (the presets are organized by models). To save or delete the current preset click this display and choose SAVE/DELETE. 2. PRESET: This knob lets you browse among X-TIME presets. 3. MODEL: This knob lets you browse among X-TIME models. To see the full model’s description refer to the AmpliTube X-GEAR Appendix. 4. MODEL DISPLAY: This display shows the current loaded model. Click it to choose a different model. 5. PARAMETERS: Use these knobs to tweak the selected model. Additional parameter pages are available by clicking on the dots over the X-TIME label. To see the full parameter list for each model refer to the AmpliTube X-GEAR Appendix. 6. ON: Use this button to activate or bypass the pedal. 7. X-MODE: Use this button to activate the X-MODE for the selected model. To see the X-MODE description for each model refer to the AmpliTube X-GEAR Appendix. 8. BPM: Use this button to sync X-TIME to the global BPM of the project. The TIME parameter will be expressed in Time Signatures. 80 Stomp Box Effects Gear Models AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop AmpliTube X-SPACE Bring your perfect X-GEAR guitar sound onstage in AmpliTube with the new AmpliTube X-SPACE reverb pedal. This boutique, true stereo pedal features 16 all-new reverb effects leveraging IK’s latest AmpliTube technologies. 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 Controls: 1. PRESET DISPLAY: This display shows the current loaded preset. Click it to choose a different preset (the presets are organized by models). To save or delete the current preset click this display and choose SAVE/DELETE. 2. PRESET: This knob lets you browse among X-SPACE presets. 3. MODEL: This knob lets you browse among X-SPACE models. To see the full model’s description refer to the AmpliTube X-GEAR Appendix. 4. MODEL DISPLAY: This display shows the current loaded model. Click it to choose a different model. 5. PARAMETERS: Use these knobs to tweak the selected model. Additional parameter pages are available by clicking on the dots over the X-SPACE label. To see the full parameter list for each model refer to the AmpliTube X-GEAR Appendix. 6. ON: Use this button to activate or bypass the pedal. 7. X-MODE: Use this button to activate the X-MODE for the selected model. To see the X-MODE description for each model refer to the AmpliTube X-GEAR Appendix. 81 Stomp Box Effects Gear Models AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop AmpliTube TONEX Stomp Overview AmpliTube TONEX Stomp is the piece of gear that lets you load your local STOMP TONE MODELs inside AmpliTube 5. You can find AmpliTube TONEX Stomp in the Gear Selector under the “Other” category. You can place AmpliTube TONEX Stomp in any pedal slot. When AmpliTube TONEX Stomp is loaded, a button below the stomp is available to access all the TONEX parameters. 82 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models By clicking this button, a top bar becomes available to show all the available parameters of TONEX. By clicking the drop-down arrow available in your computer. , the Stomp View is filled with a list of all the Stomp TONE MODELs Select any TONE MODEL from this list to load it inside AmpliTube TONEX Stomp. 83 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Press the Gear Models to close the TONE MODELs list and return to the Stomp View. You can filter the TONE MODELs’ list by using the filter button. Press the 84 to close the filter menu and return to the TONE MODEL list. Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube TONEX Stomp Parameters Advanced Parameters When the ADVANCED PARAMETERS button is pressed .a new layer is shown under the CHAIN BAR showing the available ADVANCED PARAMETERS. If the TONE EQ is set to PRE (POST disabled), it’s placed after the NOISE GATE module. If the TONE EQ is set to POST, it’s placed before the REVERB module. • • • • • • • • • • • • POST: sets the TONE EQ to be PRE (after NOISE GATE) or POST (before REVERB). BASS: adjusts the bass frequencies shelf EQ gain from 0 to 10. BASS FREQ: selects the bass frequency from 75 Hz to 600 Hz. MID: adjusts the mid frequencies peak EQ gain from 0 to 10. MID FREQ: selects the mid frequency from 150 Hz to 5 kHz. MID Q: sets the q of the mid frequencies from 0.2 to 3.0. TREBLE: adjusts the high frequencies shelf EQ gain from 0 to 10. TREBLE FREQ: selects the high frequency from 1 kHz to 4 kHz. PRESENCE: adjusts the presence of the amplifier from 0 to 10. DEPTH: adjusts the depth of the amplifier from 0 to 10. MIX: blends the Tone Model signal so that it can be used as parallel processing from 0% to 100%. RESET CHAIN: resets all parameters of the chain (not only the ADVANCED PARAMETERS) to their default values. Depending on the Tone Model GUI the bolded parameters can also be edited directly in the Amp View. In addition to these there are other two parameters available only in the Stomp View: • GAIN: sets the input gain of the Tone Model from 0 to 10 resulting in more/less saturation. • VOLUME: adjusts the master volume of the preset with all its modules from 0 to 10. 85 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Noise Gate When the NOISE GATE button is pressed a new layer is shown under the CHAIN BAR showing the available NOISE GATE parameters. By pressing the NOISE GATE icon • • • • 86 the NOISE GATE can be turned ON or OFF. ON/OFF: activates or deactivates the Noise Gate. THRESHOLD: adjusts the threshold of the gate to filter out noise, from -100 dB to 0 dB. RELEASE: adjust the release time of the gate from 20 ms to 500 ms. DEPTH: adjust the amount of noise reduction of the gate from -20 dB to -100 dB. Stomp Box Effects Gear Models AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Compressor When the COMPRESSOR button is pressed a new layer is shown under the CHAIN BAR showing the available COMPRESSOR parameters. By pressing the COMPRESSOR icon the COMPRESSOR can be turned ON or OFF. If the COMPRESSOR is set to PRE (POST disabled) it’s placed before the Tone Model module. If the COMPRESSOR is set to POST, it’s placed after the Tone Model module. • • • • • 87 ON/OFF: activates or deactivates the Compressor. POST: sets the compressor to be PRE or POST the Tone Model Module THRESHOLD: adjusts the threshold at which the compressor starts to operate from o dB to -40 dB. GAIN: adjusts the COMPRESSOR output volume from -30 dB to 0 dB. ATTACK: adjusts the compresso attack time from 1 ms to 51 ms. Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models TONE MODEL When a TONE MODEL is selected in the top bar, the TONEX Chain shows the name of the Amp and Cab that are part of that Tone Model. Note that with AmpliTube TONEX Stomp you can only load Stomp TONE MODELs. To load an Amp TONE MODEL use the AmpliTube TONEX in the Amp section of the gear selector. 88 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Reverb When the REVERB button is pressed a new layer is shown under the CHAIN BAR showing the available REVERB parameters. By pressing the REVERB icon • • • • • • 89 the REVERB can be turned ON or OFF. ON/OFF: activates or deactivates the Reverb. TYPE: sets the type of reverb between SPRING 1, SPRING 2, SPRING 3, ROOM and PLATE. TIME: sets the length of the reverb tail from 0 to 10. PRE DELAY: sets the pre-delay time before the reverb starts. COLOR: sets the reverb tone from -10 (darker) to +10 (brighter). MIX: sets the mix amount of the reverb from 0% to 100%. Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Brian May Red Special Based on Brian May’s Guitar Created by a detailed study of Brian May’s famous guitar – that he built with his father in the 60’s – this helps add the unique tonality and controls of the Red Special itself. Note: this pedal’s GUI mirrors the Red Special guitar as seen from audience’s perspective, not the guitar player. So the bridge is on the left and the neck is on the right. Controls: • SOURCE: selects the source based on your guitar type: ∙ SINGLE COIL (I): for guitars with single coil pickups (like Stratocaster). ∙ RED SPECIAL (RS): if you are using a Red Special guitar. In this case, the switches won’t do anything. ∙ HUMBUCKER (II): for guitar with humbucker pickups (like Les Paul). • PICKUP ON/OFF AND PHASE SWITCHES: these switches replicate the Red Special switches. They are active unless the source is set to Red Special, in which case the pickup section is bypassed. The first line shows the ON/OFF switches for each pickup. So you can decide which pickup is on (pickups are wired in series). The second line shows the pickups’ phase switches. For example, you can set the phase of each individual pickup to have one pickup work against another one to get very peculiar sounds. Brian’s preferred pickup configuration by far is Bridge + Middle in phase. 90 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • VOLUME: Brian May’s rig basically has a fixed gain. But he makes heavy use of his Red Special Volume knob to get more or less gain to get the sound he’s after from his rig. For example, he lowers the volume of his guitar quite a bit to get clean glassy tones.. We recommend you keep your guitar’s volume at maximum and use the volume on the Red Special stomp. This is because it works better with the noise gate at the front that would kill your tone otherwise and also because this volume helps to get the brighter cleaner sounds when you lower it. Even when the source is set to Red Special, we advise you to keep your guitar volume at maximum and use this stomp volume instead. By doing so, you’ll get close to the interaction between Brian’s Red Special and his Treble Booster which you totally lose when you connect it to the Hi-Z input of your Audio Interface. 91 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Treble Booster Based on KAT® Treble Booster Based on the original KAT® Treble Booster, this stompbox effect will enrich your guitar tone similar to Brian May’s by boosting it before it reaches the amp. This is the recently released official version of Brian’s Treble Booster by Knight Audio Technologies. KAT® has reproduced a 3-era Treble Booster corresponding to what Brian was using in the ‘70s, ‘80s and ‘90s. The differences between the three may be subtle, but they help to capture the accurate sound of these eras. Controls: • ERA: selects the era you prefer: ∙ ‘70s: replicates the RangeMaster initially used by Brian. ∙ ‘80s: replicates the Pete Cornish version of the Treble Booster.. ∙ ‘90s: replicates the KAT strap booster Brian has been using to this day. • LEVEL: This knob allows you to play with various levels of boost to drive the following amps. To get the exact gain of the corresponding era as used by Brian, set the Level knob to the mark of that era. 92 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models May Wah Based on Rackmount Dunlop® Cry Baby® Wah Based on a rackmount Dunlop® Cry Baby® wah, modeled in the exact configurations Brian uses to shape his tone. Controls: • OFF/ON/AUTO: sets the mode of the Wah effect; Off, On, or Auto.. • OFF: turns the effect Off, no Wah effect. • ON: the center frequency of the Wah effect is only set by the pedal. 93 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models FOX Phaser Based on fOXX® Foot Phaser Based on fOXX® Foot Phaser, a pedal-controlled phaser with a unique and distinctive sound which has been used on various old recordings, notably on “We Will Rock You.” It adds motion to anything you play through it. Controls: • MODE: switches between the two modes of the treadle. • TREADLE: in mode 1 (green LED ON), this sweeps the phaser frequencies. It’s like controlling the LFO with your foot. In mode 2, this controls the depth of the phaser’s LFO. • RANGE: In mode 1 (green LED ON), this controls the range of the phaser’s LFO controlled by the treadle. In mode 2 (green LED OFF), this controls the speed of the phaser’s LFO.. • FDBK: controls the depth of the phaser. 94 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Star Gate Based on Classic Noise Gate This noise gate helps clean up the signal chain, minimizing the noise feeding Brian’s unique amp and pedal setup. Controls: • THRESHOLD: turn this knob up/down to apply more/less noise reduction. 95 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Dimebag Darrell CFH Collection 6 Band EQ Based on MXR® Six Band EQ Model This pedal is a clean, highly effective graphic equalizer, capable of shaping the tone and boosting the signal for the next stompbox or amp in your chain. Controls: • FREQUENCY BAND LEVEL: each frequency band allows for +/- 15 dB of adjustment. The controls include 100 Hz, 200 Hz, 400 Hz, 800 Hz, 1.6 kHz, 3.2 kHz. 96 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Pre EQ 3 Based on Furman® Parametric Equalizer Model PQ-3™ With three totally independent EQs, this parametric EQ provides enough power to sculpt the perfect guitar tone or surgically enhance and alter any signal sent through it. Also used to boost a signal significantly before the preamp stage of an amplifier. Controls: • BASS: ∙ GAIN: adjusts the boost or cut of the bass parametric EQ, from -99 dB to +20 dB. ∙ FREQ: changes the center frequency of the bass parametric EQ, from 25 Hz to 500 Hz. ∙ WIDTH: sets the bandwidth of the bass parametric EQ, from 0 (very narrow) to 10 (very wide). • MID: ∙ GAIN: adjusts the boost or cut of the mid parametric EQ, from -99 dB to +20 dB. ∙ FREQ: changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ, from 150 Hz to 2500 Hz. ∙ Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parametric EQ, from 0 (very narrow) to 10 (very wide). • HI: ∙ GAIN: adjusts the boost or cut of the Hi parametric EQ, from -99 dB to +20 dB. ∙ FREQ: changes the center frequency of the Hi parametric EQ, from 600 Hz to 10 kHz. ∙ Q: sets the bandwidth of the Hi parametric EQ, from 0 (very narrow) to 10 (very wide). • GAIN: adjusts the boost or cut of the preamp section, from 0 to 10. • EQUALIZER BYPASS: bypass the EQ sections completely. 97 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Dime Noise Gate Based on Rocktron® Hush IIB™ Model Fine-tuned in order to match the precise settings used by Dimebag Darrell on “Cowboys From Hell”, this unit aggressively gates noise, with a very fast attack. Controls: • THRESHOLD: adjusts the sensitivity of the gate’s threshold. Adjustable from -99 to 0 dB. • FILTER: frequency of low-pass filter of the expander. Adjustable from 40 to 4000 Hz. • RELEASE: switches between slow and fast release. 98 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Dime Wah Based on Dunlop® Crybaby GCB-95™ Model An iconic and legendary wah pedal, fine-tuned to match Dimebag Darell’s use and settings from the “Cowboys From Hell” album. Controls: • PEDAL POSITION: controls the Wah effect from 0 to 100%. 99 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Flanger Doubler Based on MXR® Flanger Doubler™ Model Two effects in one unit: a great-sounding Flanger and Doubler that can thicken your sound in incredible ways. Controls: • • • • • • • 100 THRESHOLD: adjusts the sensitivity of the gate’s threshold. Adjustable from -99 to 0 dB. MODE: switches between Flanger and Doubler mode. DELAY: sets the timbre of the flanging effect from 0 to 10. WIDTH: sets the amount of modulation the LFO will apply to the flanging effect from 0 to 10. SPEED: controls the amount of high tones on the sound from 0 to 10. FEEDBACK: sets the amount of feedback the internal flanger effect will have from 0 to 10. MIX: sets the balance between the wet and dry signal from 0 to 10. Stomp Box Effects Gear Models AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Fender® Fender® Blender™ Officially Certified Fender® Blender™ Model A unique germanium fuzz/distortion pedal. With a tone unlike any distortion pedal on the market, the Blender™ is capable of a harsh fuzz-effect unlike most vintage distortion pedals, and is great as a tool for Alternative Rock and modern Metal soloing. Perfect for those who want to create instead of copying, with a bit of experimentation, this pedal can deliver a huge range of unique tones. Controls: • • • • • • 101 Volume: controls the overall output volume of the effect. Sustain: adds sustain and distortion to the input signal from 1 to 10. Tone: shifts the tonal balance from low to high frequencies from 1 (low) to 10 (high). Blend: controls the mix of the original to the effected signal from 1 to 10. Tone Boost: adds range to the tone control. On/Off: turns the effect on or off. Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Fender® Volume A classic volume control. Use to control the volume of your guitar signal, or in conjunction with an overdrive/ distortion pedal for dynamic control of your signal boost. Controls: • Volume: adjusts the volume of the output signal • Min: controls the range of the volume effect. • On/Off: turns the effect on or off. 102 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Fender® Wah Based on Fender® Cyber-Twin® SE Wah The Fender® Wah model is based on the Fender® Cyber-Twin® SE Wah. Two distinct wah voices give this model a huge range of “wah-ptions.” Switch between the traditional “Cryin’” sound or the famous “Clyde McCoy” inspired sound. Both are included in the same pedal. Adjust your effect frequency range with the minimum and maximum knobs, and control the amount of effect applied with the “wah” control and volume level knobs. A very inspiring pedal that will add dramatic effects to your bass lines. Controls: • • • • • 103 Min Freq: controls the minimum frequency effected from 1 to 10. Max Freq: controls the maximum frequency effected from 1 to 10. Volume: controls the volume of the wah effect from 1 to 10. Cryin’/McCoy: switches between two different classic Wah styles. On/Off: turns the effect on or off. Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Fender® Fuzz Wah Officially Certified Fender® Fuzz Wah Model A combination of a Fuzz-style distortion effect and a Wah pedal, the Fuzz Wah is two pedals in one. Due to this combination, the Fuzz Wah is capable of effects not easily achieved by traditional distortion and Wah-style effects. Controls: • Pedal: use to control the frequency and amount of the Wah/Fuzz effect. Up/Down controls the Wah, Left/ Right controls Fuzz. Holding the SHIFT key while dragging allows you to easily choose between moving the pedal vertically or horizontally only. • Fuzz Control: controls the volume of the Fuzz-distortion. • Effects Order: switches the order of the effects (Wah->Fuzz or Fuzz->Wah) within the pedal to give two different tone styles. • Fuzz Volume: adjusts the amount and volume of the Fuzz effect. • Fuzz button: turns the Fuzz effect on-off. • Wah button: turns the Wah effect on-off. 104 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Fender® Phaser Officially Certified Fender® Phaser Model A Classic analog Phase shift effect as heard on countless recordings since the 1970s. Controls: • On/Off: turns the effect on or off. • Rate Knob: controls the rate at which the phase shift occurs. The rate control knob alternately illuminates blue and red at the same rate as the phase shifting. • Intensity: this knob adjusts the intensity of the phasing effect. • Frequency: this knob adjusts what frequencies are affected by the phasing action. • BPM Sync: syncs the effect to the master BPM of your DAW/Standalone metronome. 105 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Fender® Tremolo Based on the classic Fender® tube tremolo circuit Based on the classic Fender® tube tremolo circuit, you can adjust the speed and intensity to perfection and add this classic effect to any amplifier setting. The BPM sync function allows automated effect syncing to your DAW tempo, or set your tempo manually to add a dramatic tremolo sparkle or darkness to your tracks. Controls: • BPM Sync: turns BPM sync on and off overriding the Speed control and taking the tempo from your DAW instead to determine the rate of the tremolo effect. • Speed: determines the rate of the tremolo effect. Note that if BPM sync is turned on, your DAW’s tempo will override the Speed knob. • Intensity: determines the amount of tremolo effect. 106 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Fender® ’63 Reverb Officially Certified Fender® ‘63 Reverb Model First introduced in 1963, this classic all-tube spring reverb unit is capable of producing an incredibly lush Reverb due to it’s unique 6v6 driven output. Controls: • Dwell: controls the amount of the reverb effect from 1 to 10. The spring reverb is overdriven when Dwell is set to high values (from 7 to 10). This produces interesting and very characteristic tones. • Tone: shifts the tonal balance from low to high frequencies from 1 to 10. • Mixer: controls the mix of the original signal to the effected signal from 1 to 10. 107 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Fender® Tape Echo Based on Fender® Cyber-Twin® SE Tape Echo A classic tape echo effect, taken from the Fender® Cyber-Twin®. Use for retro, lo-fi-style echo effects, or to add a subtle amount of ambience to your playing. Controls: • Echo Level: controls the amount of the echo effect from 1 to 10. • Time: controls the length of the echo effect from 30ms to 1450ms. When BPM Sync is turned on, time is displayed from a 1/32 to 1/1 ratio. • Feedback: controls the amount of repeats of the echo effect from 1 to 10. • Wow&Flutter: controls the amount of pitch drift/variation of the echo effect, to emulate tape playback from 1 to 10. • Brightness: controls the amount of high-end of the treble from 1 to 10. • Volume: controls the volume of the echo effect from 1 to 10. • Ramp/Step: alters the way that changes to echo time change from a “ramp up” style” to a “stair step” style. • BPM Sync: syncs the effect to the master BPM of your DAW/Standalone metronome. 108 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Fender® Compressor Based on Fender® Cyber-Twin® SE Compressor Based on the Fender® Cyber-Twin® SE compressor, this stomp box allows you to increase your signal gain before it hits other effects and amplifiers, or use it elsewhere in your pedalboard chain to create dramatic “attack” effects. The Fender® Stomp Compressor has four detented switch positions for varying degrees of gain boost and compression. Controls: Ratio Knob: sets the amount of compression from “Low” to “Even Higher”. 109 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Fulltone® OCD Officially Certified Fulltone® OCD® Model An overdrive pedal that provides the same kind of touch sensitivity and complex harmonics that you’d get from a quality tube amp. Volume, Tone, and Drive controls let you dial in the perfect sound for your song. Take your overdriven tones to a new level with OCD. Controls: • VOLUME: sets the overall volume, from 0 to 10. • DRIVE: controls the amount of distortion, from 0 to 10. • TONE: controls the tone of the distortion pedal, from 0 to 10. 110 Stomp Box Effects Gear Models AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Jimi Hendrix Class Fuzz Based on Roger Mayer™ Classic Fuzz® This effect is based on the fuzz pedal that can be heard on Jimi Hendrix’s early recordings. Controls: • VOLUME: sets the output volume of the stomp effect, from -inf to 0.0 dB. • DRIVE: sets the fuzz sound by increasing or decreasing the amount of distortion, from 0 to 10. 111 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models EP Tape Echo Based on Maestro® Echoplex™ The EP Tape Echo is the gold standard of vintage tape-echo units. Jimi Hendrix liked experimenting with it to produce wild psychedelic effects in the studio, and he used it heavily during the recording of Electric Ladyland. Controls: • DELAY SLIDER: moves the Recording Head changing the length of the delay between each echo, from 26 ms to 939 ms. • VOLUME: sets the level of the effected (or wet) sound, from 1 to 9. • BPM: allows the effect to synchronize to the project tempo. • SUSTAIN: changes the amount of time that the echo repeats, from 1 to 9. 112 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Fuzz Age Based on Arbiter® Fuzz Face® This effect is modeled after a classic germanium transistor fuzz stomp effect. Typically used on lead guitar, this effect has remained a popular distortion effect throughout the years. Controls: • VOL: sets the output volume of the stomp effect, from –inf. to 0.0 dB. • FUZZ: sets the fuzz level of the effect, from 0 to 10. 113 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Fuzz Age 2 Based on Arbiter® Fuzz Face® This classic germanium transistor fuzz effect was the main fuzz box used by Jimi Hendrix. Often combined with a wah, this effect produced permanent sustain and endless distortion. The original Fuzz Face® is one of the most collectible fuzz boxes ever. Controls: • VOL: sets the output volume of the stomp effect, from –inf. to 0.0 dB. • FUZZ: sets the fuzz level of the effect, from 0 to 10. 114 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models FuzzOne Based on Maestro® FuzzTone™ Jimi Hendrix began using this fuzz box while playing in New York City before founding the Experience. Its sounds can be heard in the enormously popular Rolling Stones song “Satisfaction”. Controls: • VOLUME: sets the output volume of the stomp effect, from –inf to 0.0 dB. • ATTACK: adjusts the sound character by having more or less distortion. 115 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Octa-V Based on Roger Mayer™ Octavia® This effect was first used on “Purple Haze” and “Fire.” It is a fuzz box with frequency-doubling circuitry that produces a second note an octave above the fundamental note. Controls: • VOLUME: sets the output volume of the stomp effect, from –inf to 0.0 dB. • DRIVE: sets the amount of distortion the unit will produce, from 0 to 10. The higher octave can be more distinct for medium positions of this control. 116 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Opto Tremolo Based on Fender® Super Reverb® Amp Opto-Tremolo™ This model is based on a vintage Opto-Tremolo effect. Controls: • RATE: sets the rate of the Flanger effect, from 0 to 10. • DEPTH: sets the intensity of the Flanger, from 0 to 10. • BPM SYNC: allows the effect to synchronize to the project tempo. 117 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models RightFuzz Based on Mosrite® Fuzzrite® This effect is modeled after a highly sought-after, rare fuzz box. It was one of the first commercially available floor effect units, making its first appearance in 1966. It doesn’t get any more vintage than this when it comes to stomp pedals. Controls: • VOLUME: sets the output volume of the stomp effect, from 1 to 6. • DEPTH: sets the timbre of the distortion, from 1 to 6. 118 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Uni-V Based on Univox™ Uni-vibe™ This effect is based on an original optical phaser/chorus. This was a chorus/rotating-speaker simulator that was introduced in 1969 and used predominantly in live performances. This created a swirling effect quite similar to the most famous rotary speaker cabinet but with the addition of speed control. This effect was employed on tracks such as “Hey Baby (New Rising Sun),” “Earth Blues,” and “Machine Gun”. Controls: • VOLUME: sets the output volume of the stomp effect, from –inf to 0.0 dB. • INTENSITY: sets the depth of the modulation, from 0 to 10. The sound is affected even when the Intensity knob is set to zero. • RATE: sets the rate of the Chorus/Vibrato effect from 0 to 10. The LFO rate is going from approx 1 Hz to approx 8 Hz. • CHORUS/VIBRATO SWITCH: selects the Chorus of Vibrato effect. Default: Chorus. 119 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Wah 46 Based on Vox® Wah V846™ This effect is based on the most famous Wah-Wah model used by Jimi Hendrix, which became his signature sound in masterpiece tunes like “Voodoo Child.” Although the original had no auto-Wah features, this additional functionality has been added for a more convenient usage when played on a computer. The original model is considered to be one of the best sounding Wah-Wahs of all time. Controls: • OFF/ON/AUTO: sets the mode of the Wah effect; Off, On, or Auto. • OFF: turns the effect Off, no Wah effect. • ON: the center frequency of the Wah effect is only set by the pedal. 120 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models XS Fuzz Based on Roger Mayer™ Axis Fuzz® This effect is modeled after the effect used on the title track of the album “Axis Bold as Love.” The original stomp can also be heard on the “Band of Gypsies” and various Jimi Hendrix recordings post 1968. Controls: • VOLUME: sets the output volume of the stomp effect, from –inf to 0.0 dB. • DRIVE: sets the distortion amount, from 0 to 10. 121 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Joe Satriani Satch Wah Based on Vox® Big Bad Wah Based on Joe’s personal Vox® Big Bad Wah, offering two inductor coils each with their own voicing, plus an extra gain drive and normal or 535-type sweep. Controls: • INDUCTOR: Switches between two different inductor coils (U.K. and U.S.). • VOICE: Switches between two different frequency response, a classic CryBaby one (Bright) and a darker one (Dark). • DRIVE: Adjusts the overdrive gain of the Wah 2. • WAH TYPE: Switches between the two Wah sounds. 122 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Satch Distortion Based on BOSS® DS-1 Based on Joe’s personal BOSS® DS-1, an early ‘80’s Japanese-made unit, this legendary distortion unit is one of the most recognizable pedals ever made. Controls: • LEVEL: Controls the pedal output level. • DIST: Controls the amount of distortion the pedal gives. • TONE: Controls the timbre of the distortion pedal. 123 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Satch Overdrive Based on BOSS® OD-1 Based on an early ‘80s Japanese-made BOSS® OD-1, this overdrive pedal has long been a standard for ‘70s and ‘80s classic and hard rock. Controls: • LEVEL: Controls the pedal output level. • DRIVE: Controls the amount of overdrive the pedal gives. 124 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Tube Overdrive Based on Chandler® Tube Driver Based on Joe’s personal Chandler® Tube Driver, this overdrive pedal offers generous distortion thanks to its onboard 12AX7 valve. Controls: • • • • 125 LEVEL: Controls the pedal output level. DRIVE: Controls the amount of overdrive the pedal gives. EQ LOW: Sets the amount of low frequencies in the sound. EQ HI: Sets the amount of high frequencies in the sound. Stomp Box Effects Gear Models AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Satch Octave Based on Ultimate Octave Modeled on the Ultimate Octave pedal, a versatile update of the famous Octavia fuzz with a “Fat / Bright” switch for two different distortion & octave characters. Controls: • • • • • 126 VOLUME: Controls the Satch Octave pedal output level. TONE: Controls the timbre of the pedal. DISTORTION: Controls the amount of distortion the pedal gives. FAT: Switches between a standard bright and a more mid-range frequency response. OCTAVE-UP: Enables the octave effect. Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Morley® Contour Wah Officially Certified Morley® Contour Wah™ Model The Morley Contour Wah is a modelled recreation of the original hardware pedal. This pedal offers a distinctive sonic signature as it was developed in conjunction with a notable guitarist in the contemporary rock field. Furthermore it has some cool features that make it tweakable and customizable to suit different sound requirements. The sound of this wah is very modern and cutting, as it’s focused on specific key frequencies that give it presence. However, the contour feature can modify this, making it mellower or sharper, depending on the user’s requirements. The original hardware sports an auto ON/OFF function as the rocker pedal is pressed or released, and the spring load feature, which brings the rocker pedal back to the heel position as the pedal is released. These features are included and adapted to work with AmpliTube’s behavior and functionality. Controls: • PEDAL: controls the filter’s frequency of the “Wah” effect. • CONTOUR KNOB: shifts the filter’s shape; counterclockwise positions have a mellower sound, clockwise positions sharpen the high frequency response. • CONTOUR SWITCH: activates the Contour function, whose frequency is controlled by the Contour knob. • LEVEL KNOB: controls the additional level of the pedal when the Contour switch is active. Values are from 127 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models -8 dBs to +4 dBs. • ON: global bypass of the pedal. • AUTO OFF: if activated the pedal automatically shuts off when the rocker is in the heel position. Make sure you do a proper hardware controller calibration before using the AUTO OFF feature. • DELAY TIME: when AUTO OFF is activated, DELAY TIME controls the time it takes for the pedal to shut off once the rocker is brought to the heel position. Time range is 0 to 3 seconds. 128 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Oil Can Delay Officially Certified Morley® EVO-1 Oil Can Delay Model The Morley EVO-1 Oil Can Delay is the first guitar stompbox that introduced Morley to the guitar pedal world. This stomp has all the characteristics of the iconic ‘70s oil can delay sound, which features an oil can drum containing a spinning, anodized metallic disk with two heads to write and read the sound that is stored electrostatically thanks to the oil that is stored inside the can. The EVO-1’s main feature is its dirtiness and inconsistency. The oil provides a waterly and warbly sound giving a result close to a vibrato effect that is unpredictable and inconsistent and full of wow and flutter. Controls: • ECHO SPEED: sets the speed of the motor moving the disc resulting in faster or slower delay repetitions. • MULTIPLE ECHO LIMIT: sets the desired range on which the expression pedal operates controlling the feedback. • ECHO VOLUME LIMIT: sets the volume of the echo wet signal. • STEREO – MONAURAL: when used in a stereo path the EVO-1 can be set to STEREO to have the full dry signal on one side and the full wet signal on the other. Use the MONAURAL option for regular use. • EXPRESSION PEDAL: controls the delay’s feedback. Its range depends on the multiple echo limit control. • ECHO – VOLUME: when set to VOLUME the pedal works as a volume pedal, when set to ECHO the pedal works as an oil can delay. 129 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • DISK ERASE: when set to 10 the disk gets fully erased as it’s spinning so that the current signal is not contaminated by the past signal. Decreasing the disk erase parameter increases the instability and randomness of the repetitions that are influenced by the past audio signal that has not been completely erased. The little line around the knob highlights the typical range for normal use. Pushing the knob outside the highlighted range provides more experimental and creative sound effects. • DISK NOISE: when set to 0 the disk works as an ideal disk with no additional noise, by raising the disk noise parameter the disk spinning noise is added into the path to give a dirtier and more vintage sound. • BPM: when set to ON the echo speed parameter operates in signatures of the projects tempo. • ON/OFF: activates/bypasses the effect entirely. 130 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Power Wah Fuzz Officially Certified Morley® PWF Power Wah Fuzz Model The Power Wah Fuzz pedal is a 1970s classic Wah and Fuzz pedal that work together for a powerful combination of heavy tones. The fuzz is very aggressive and thick. Wonderful on guitar but astonishing also on bass, it was a weapon of choice for the famous Metallica bassist Cliff Burton. Controls: • • • • • • 131 POWER ON/OFF: activates/bypasses the effect entirely. INTENSITY: sets the amount of distortion coming from the fuzz circuit. TONE: sets the general tone of the fuzz: at 0.0 it’s darker and mellower, at 10.0 i’’s brighter and edgier. FUZZ ON/OFF: activates/bypasses the fuzz circuit. EXPRESSION PEDAL: controls the wah filter effect. POWER WAH ON/OFF: activates/bypasses the wah circuit. Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Seymour Duncan® Power Grid Officially Certified Seymour Duncan® Power Grid™ Model The Power Grid is a high gain, solid state distortion pedal capable of a myriad of tones thanks to a threeband active EQ section. It is perfect for all styles of rock. The pedal is designed to provide powerful overdrive and distortion suitable for all kinds of rhythm and lead playing thanks to five stages of discrete Class A circuitry. This raw horsepower is managed by a multi-element gain and volume control system that provides very fine control. The tone is further refined with three bands of active EQ. Each band allows for up to 12dB of boost or cut at selectable frequencies for maximum control. This allows you to create tones with a far greater degree of surgical precision than what’s possible with any distortion pedal with a traditional passive EQ. Controls: • • • • • • 132 VOLUME: sets the overall volume, from 1 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies, from 1 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies, from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies, from 1 to 10. GAIN: controls the amount of distortion. ON/OFF: bypasses the effect. Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Shape Shifter Officially Certified Seymour Duncan® Shape Shifter™ Model This amazing stomp box reproduces the hypnotic, pulsing tremolo sound characteristic of ‘50s tube amps. It can also produce crazy and innovative tones never heard before. With its detailed “Wave” and “Shape” controls, it is one of the most versatile tremolo stomp boxes available. The Wave control shapes the tremolo effect from a smooth sine wave to a sharper triangle wave to the abrupt “on/off effect” of a square wave. The Shape control sets the rise and fall time of the tremolo (how fast or slow the volume increases and decreases). This adds some very different variations to the tremolo effect: With a quick swell and a slow drop, the effect is percussive like a piano. Conversely, with a slow swell and a sudden drop, the result is reminiscent of a tape played backwards. A LED pulses in time with the tremolo effect to easily set the Rate. Controls: • DEPTH: sets the intensity of the effect, varying the tremolo effect from a subtle shimmer to an intense rhythmic pulse. • SHAPE: this control varies the tremolo rise and fall time (how fast or slow the volume increases and decreases) for unique percussion, “reverse decay” effects and everything in between. • WAVE: sets the wave form from a smooth sine wave (like vintage amps) to a choppier triangular wave to an abrupt “on/off”pulsing square wave. • RATE: sets the speed of the tremolo effect (A LED flashes in time with the tremolo effect to easily set the Rate). • BPM SYNC: allows the effect to synchronize to the DAW tempo. • ON/OFF: bypasses the effect. 133 Stomp Box Effects Gear Models AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Slash /Delay Based on Boss® DD-3™ The digital delay stomp box used by Slash. It is based on one of the most famous modern digital delays. Use this effect to add space and repetitions to your parts. Controls: • • • • • 134 LEVEL: sets the level of the effected (or wet) sound, from 0 to 10. TIME: changes the length of the delay between each repetition, from 1ms to 800ms. FEEDBACK: changes the amount of time that the echo repeats, from 0 to 10. ON BPM: allows the effect to synchronize to the BPM tempo. ON/OFF: bypasses the effect. Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Booster Based on MXR® CAE MC401™ Boost/Line Driver The booster stomp box used by Slash. It boosts your signal up to 20 dB. It’s perfect for solos, punchy rhythm parts or to drive effects harder for more dynamics and sensitivity. Controls: • dB: boosts the signal from 0 to 20 dB. • ON/OFF: bypasses the effect. 135 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Gate Based on MXR® Smart Gate® The gate stomp box used by Slash. It gates out noise slowly when notes are being held and quickly when they are stopped short. Controls: • LEVEL: varies the sensitivity of the gate‘s threshold, allowing it to be adjustable to any input source. from 0 to 10. • Three filter cut-off points are available: Full, Mid, or Hiss Band: • FULL: the Full Band noise cut is most effective in quieting input sources with low-end hum and buzz problems. • MID: the Mid noise band cut is effective on instruments with high gain midrange frequency boost. • HISS: the Hiss noise band cut works well with instruments and input sources that have high frequency boost. • ON/OFF: bypasses the effect. 136 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models OctoBlue Based on MXR® Blue Box™ Octave Fuzz The Fuzz/Octave stomp box used by Slash. Adds fuzz to your signal and then duplicates it two octaves down. This is one of the most evil and vicious pedals! Controls: • OUTPUT: sets the output volume of the stomp effect, from 0 to 10. • BLEND: adjusts ratio of fuzzed signal with Octaved signal, from 0 to 10. • ON/OFF: bypasses the effect. 137 Stomp Box Effects Gear Models AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop X-Chorus Based on MXR® M134™ The chorus stomp box used by Slash offering great control and flexibility. Used in one of the most famous song in the history of Rock: Paradise City. Use this stomp box with Clean/Crunch settings to add shimmer and moving modulation to arpeggios or chords. Controls: • • • • • • • 138 INT.: sets overall chorus effect, from 0 to 10. WIDTH: sets the amplitude of the modulation from light to deep, from 0 to 10. RATE: sets the speed of the modulation from slow shimmering to watery, from 0 to 10. BASS FILTER: keeps low end frequencies intact. BASS: adjusts the bass frequencies of the chorus voice , from 0 to 10. TREBLE: adjusts the high frequencies of the chorus voice, from 0 to 10. ON/OFF: bypasses the effect. Stomp Box Effects Gear Models AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop WahDist Based on Dunlop® Slash Signature Wah SW95™ The wah pedal with integrated distortion used by Slash. One of the most classic wahs combined with powerful high gain distortion. Very useful on rock solos to add expression and bending. Controls: • • • • • 139 WAH: directly controls the Wah effect, from 0 to 10. DIST: enables the distortion. GAIN: adjusts the input gain. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 0 to 10. VOL: adjusts the output level (when distortion is enable), from 0 to 10. ON/OFF: bypasses the effect. Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models T-Rex® Møller Officially Certified T-Rex® Møller™ Model The T-Rex Møller is a unique overdrive pedal that creates a wide variety of overdriven tones with flexible tonal control along with a separate transparent 0-20 dB adjustable and switchable clean boost and a special option to mix overdriven and clean signals. The Møller was developed in 2003 for a well known Danish guitarist named Knud Møller who wanted a tube screamer but with an added clean boost. T-Rex made the custom pedal based on the Alberta and subsequently named the Møller pedal after the guitarist. Controls: • • • • • • • • 140 TONE: changes the color of the overdrive. LEVEL: adjusts the output volume. GAIN: controls the amount of overdrive. BOOST (knob): cleanly boosts the output of the pedal from 1 to 20 dB independent of the overdrive circuit. Used for increasing your volume for soloing. MIX: mixes the balance between the overdriven signal and clean signal. ON/OFF: turns the overdrive effect on and off. VOICE: optimizes for humbucker or single coil pickups. BOOST (switch): turns the clean boost on and off. Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Mudhoney Officially Certified T-Rex® Mudhoney™ Model The T-Rex Mudhoney is designed for those looking for an in-your-face wall of sound jumping out of the speakers. The boost button and the tone knob give you the ability to dial in any sound you like from ultra fuzz to smooth jazz sounds. With the boost function bypassed, the Mudhoney delivers moderate gain and a rich, smooth sound that many jazz guitarists prefer. The boost button engages a high gain circuit for a more aggressive sound. Controls: • GAIN: controls the amount of distortion. • LEVEL: sets the overall volume. In middle position (12:00), the volume level is 1:1. When turned fully clockwise, the output signal is boosted by 15 dB. • TONE: changes the color of the overdrive. • BOOST (switch): switches between moderate and high gain. 141 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Replica Officially Certified T-Rex® Replica™ Model The T-Rex Replica is possibly the world’s best delay pedal. With its astonishingly warm tone and clever tap tempo feature, it is the perfect mix of controls that delivers everything the most demanding guitarists could ask for in a delay. The Replica is used by guitar heroes from Pete Townsend to John Mayer to deliver their classic sounds. Controls: • ECHO: mixes between the amount of delay signal and dry signal. • LEVEL: sets the overall volume. At maximum level, the signal is boosted by approximately 3 dB. • REPEAT: controls the number of repeats in the delay signal. At the minimum position, the delay repeats only once. At the maximum position, the delay signal repeats almost infinitely and self-oscillates. • TEMPO: sets the delay time. The minimum delay time is approximately 12 milliseconds, and the maximum delay time is approximately 1,500 milliseconds. Note that the delay signal is muted when the TEMPO knob is turned while playing to avoid unwanted pitch changing artifacts. • ON/OFF: bypasses the effect. • SUBDIVISION: syncs the effect to the master BPM of your DAW/Standalone metronome. • BROWN: is a High-Cut filter that alters the tone of the repeats. The result is a warmer, smoother delay sound reminiscent of a vintage tape echo. 142 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Wampler Pedals® Nirvana Officially Certified Wampler Nirvana™ Chorus/Vibrato Model A very versatile chorus pedal capable of many modulation colors. The power of this pedal lies in the triple mode Intensity switch which sets the range of the modulation that can then be dialed in with the Depth control. The Tone control, a feature that other chorus pedals lack, fine tunes the high end content of the chorused signal, a nice touch to get a lush shimmer effect. An additional cool feature, the “Vib” switch, effectively acts as a dry kill switch, turning the chorus in a vibrato. Controls: DEPTH: sets the modulation amount. RATE: sets the modulation speed. LEVEL: sets the ratio between the dry and chorused signal. TONE: fine tunes the high end content of the chorused signal. INTENSITY: this is a three way switch where each position gives a progressively increased modulation range. • VIB: this switch kills the dry part of the signal leaving only the chorused sound which, being modulated, will sound like a vibrato effect. Speed, Depth, Tone and Level controls will work on the vibrato character. • • • • • 143 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Pinnacle Deluxe Officially Certified Wampler Pinnacle Deluxe™ Model This pedal is designed to reproduce the sound of late 70’s to early 80’s plexi-style amplifiers pushed to their limit. This classic tone, also known as “Brown Sound” was the trademark of several guitarists of that era, later known as “shredders”. This pedal has the flexibility of a dual mode operation, where it can be used as a standard overdrive, or pushed further with the Boost switch, where an additional gain stage is added for increased distortion. On top of this cool and handy feature, the Tone and Contour controls allow you to find the perfect balance of high end and midrange, so that the pedal can be tailored to rhythm or lead sounds with relative ease. Controls: GAIN: sets the level of distortion of the pedal. VOLUME: sets the output level of the pedal. TONE: fine tunes the high end response of the pedal: clockwise values result in more high end. CONTOUR: Determines the midrange response of the pedal; clockwise positions result in more scooped mids. VINTAGE/MODERN: this switch toggles the pedals frequency response between Vintage (with a mellower character) and Modern, with a more full range response and high end content. • BOOST: kicks in an additional gain stage for increased distortion - useful for leads. • • • • • 144 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Z.Vex® Seek Trem Officially Certified Z.Vex® Seek Trem™ Model Seek Trem is a tremolo pedal combined with an adjustable 4-, 6-, or 8-step analog-style sequencer. Each step has a volume knob so that you can turn it up or down in the pedal’s output, giving you complete control over the rhythmic pattern, and allowing for ultimate creativity. There’s also a knob for adjusting the pattern’s overall speed. Controls: • • • • 145 BPM: allows the effect to synchronize to the DAW tempo. 4-6-8: governs the number of steps. SPD (speed): sets what time interval each step represents. STEP KNOBS (from 1 to 8): set the volume for each step, from 0 to 10. Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Seek Wah Officially Certified Z.Vex® Seek Wah™ Model A wah with a 4-, 6-, or 8-step analog-style sequencer in it, featuring LEDs that light up to show the steps. The speed control governs overall sequencer tempo, and the 4-6-8 switch governs the number of steps. This pedal produces rhythmic-pattern wah sounds that are totally unique. Controls: • • • • 146 BPM: allows the effect to synchronize to the DAW tempo. 4-6-8: governs the number of steps. SPD (speed): sets what time interval each step represents. STEP KNOBS (from 1 to 8): set the position of the wah, from 0 to 10. Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube X-GEAR Appendix X-DRIVE Distortion Models MODERN This overdrive adds pleasing harmonics for a tube-like sound. It recreates creamy saturation with a solid warm low end. Parameters: • DRIVE: increases the amount of clipping in the distortion circuit. From 0 to 10. • BASS: boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. 147 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • VOLUME: sets the output level. From 0 to 10. • COLOR: controls the tone of the distortion. From 0 to 10. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parameter EQ from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • EQ POSITION: sets the tone EQ pre or post clipping. PRE or POST. • NOISE GATE: turns the noise gate ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • NG THRESHOLD: adjusts the sensitivity of the gate’s threshold. From -100 dB to 0 dB. • NG RELEASE: adjusts the time of the gate’s release. From 20 ms to 1500 ms. • NG DEPTH: adjusts the gate’s deepness. From -20 dB to -100 dB. • COMPRESSOR: turns the compressor ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • COMP SENSITIVITY: sets the sensitivity of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • COMP OUT: sets the output level of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • CAB SIM: selects the cabinet simulator. CAB 1, CAB 2, CAB 3, CAB 4, BASS, OFF. • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet distorted signal. By default, the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE boosts the output signal to achieve more volume in certain parts during the performance. ON or OFF. 148 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models METAL Based on BOSS® MT-2 Inspired by one of the most favorite metal pedals of all time, perfect for extreme gain and sustain. Nothing compares to this pedal for pure distortion mayhem. It features punch, color and presence to sculpt the perfect high gain tone under your feet. Parameters: • DRIVE: increases the amount of clipping in the distortion circuit. From 0 to 10. • BASS: boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • VOLUME: sets the output level. From 0 to 10. • PUNCH: boosts the low frequencies. From -15 dB to 15 dB. • COLOR: enhance the mid-frequency response. From -15 dB to +15 dB. • COLOR FREQ: selects the mid-frequency for the COLOR parameter. From 300 Hz to 6000 Hz. • PRESENCE: boosts the high frequencies. From -15 dB to +15 dB. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parameter EQ from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • EQ POSITION: sets the tone EQ pre or post clipping. PRE or POST. • NOISE GATE: turns the noise gate ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • NG THRESHOLD: adjusts the sensitivity of the gate’s threshold. From -100 dB to 0 dB. • NG RELEASE: adjusts the time of the gate’s release. From 20 ms to 1500 ms. • NG DEPTH: adjusts the gate’s deepness. From -20 dB to -100 dB. • COMPRESSOR: turns the compressor ON or OFF. ON or OFF. 149 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • COMP SENSITIVITY: sets the sensitivity of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • COMP OUT: sets the output level of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • CAB SIM: selects the cabinet simulator. CAB 1, CAB 2, CAB 3, CAB 4, BASS, OFF. • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet distorted signal. By default, the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE boosts the output signal to achieve more volume in certain parts during the performance. ON or OFF. 150 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models MONARCH Based on Marshall® Guv’Nor This pedal is a model of a beloved ‘80s-era distortion pedal by a company known for making amps with amazing distortion. Parameters: • DRIVE: increases the amount of clipping in the distortion circuit. From 0 to 10. • BASS: boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • VOLUME: sets the output level. From 0 to 10. • COLOR: controls the tone of the distortion pedal. From 0 to 10. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parameter EQ from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • EQ POSITION: sets the tone EQ pre or post clipping. PRE or POST. • NOISE GATE: turns the noise gate ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • NG THRESHOLD: adjusts the sensitivity of the gate’s threshold. From -100 dB to 0 dB. • NG RELEASE: adjusts the time of the gate’s release. From 20 ms to 1500 ms. • NG DEPTH: adjusts the gate’s deepness. From -20 dB to -100 dB. • COMPRESSOR: turns the compressor ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • COMP SENSITIVITY: sets the sensitivity of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • COMP OUT: sets the output level of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • CAB SIM: selects the cabinet simulator. CAB 1, CAB 2, CAB 3, CAB 4, BASS, OFF. 151 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet distorted signal. By default. the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE boosts the output signal to achieve more volume in certain parts during the performance. ON or OFF. 152 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models CAT Based on ProCo® Rat™ One of the most beloved distortion boxes ever. From smooth, light crunch, to extreme shred sustain offering a fuzzlike flavor. This pedal has been a classic ever since its release in the early ‘80s. Parameters: • DRIVE: increases the amount of clipping in the distortion circuit. From 0 to 10. • BASS: boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • VOLUME: sets the output level. From 0 to 10. • COLOR: controls the tone of the distortion. From 0 to 10. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parameter EQ from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • EQ POSITION: sets the tone EQ pre or post clipping. PRE or POST. • NOISE GATE: turns the noise gate ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • NG THRESHOLD: adjusts the sensitivity of the gate’s threshold. From -100 dB to 0 dB. • NG RELEASE: adjusts the time of the gate’s release. From 20 ms to 1500 ms. • NG DEPTH: adjusts the gate’s deepness. From -20 dB to -100 dB. • COMPRESSOR: turns the compressor ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • COMP SENSITIVITY: sets the sensitivity of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • COMP OUT: sets the output level of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • CAB SIM: selects the cabinet simulator. CAB 1, CAB 2, CAB 3, CAB 4, BASS, OFF. 153 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet distorted signal. By default, the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE boosts the output signal to achieve more volume in certain parts during the performance. ON or OFF. 154 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models ORANGE Based on BOSS® DS-1 This is one of the most versatile distortion boxes ever made. From subtle crunch to complete craziness, this pedal has been used by countless guitarists of all styles from classic rock to grunge. Parameters: • DRIVE: increases the amount of clipping in the distortion circuit. From 0 to 10. • BASS: boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • VOLUME: sets the output level. From 0 to 10. • COLOR: controls the tone of the distortion. From 0 to 10. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parameter EQ from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • EQ POSITION: sets the tone EQ pre or post clipping. PRE or POST. • NOISE GATE: turns the noise gate ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • NG THRESHOLD: adjusts the sensitivity of the gate’s threshold. From -100 dB to 0 dB. • NG RELEASE: adjusts the time of the gate’s release. From 20 ms to 1500 ms. • NG DEPTH: adjusts the gate’s deepness. From -20 dB to -100 dB. • COMPRESSOR: turns the compressor ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • COMP SENSITIVITY: sets the sensitivity of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • COMP OUT: sets the output level of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • CAB SIM: selects the cabinet simulator. CAB 1, CAB 2, CAB 3, CAB 4, BASS, OFF. 155 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet distorted signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE boosts the output signal to achieve more volume in certain parts during the performance. ON or OFF. 156 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models YELLOW Based on BOSS® SD-1 One of the earliest and most collectible Japanese pedals, it’s one of the most iconic overdrive pedals ever made. From subtle to over-the-top, it pushes amps harder without sacrificing attack clarity. Parameters: • DRIVE: increases the amount of clipping in the distortion circuit. From 0 to 10. • BASS: boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • VOLUME: sets the output level. From 0 to 10. • COLOR: controls the tone of the distortion. From 0 to 10. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parameter EQ from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • EQ POSITION: sets the tone EQ pre or post clipping. PRE or POST. • NOISE GATE: turns the noise gate ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • NG THRESHOLD: adjusts the sensitivity of the gate’s threshold. From -100 dB to 0 dB. • NG RELEASE: adjusts the time of the gate’s release. From 20 ms to 1500 ms. • NG DEPTH: adjusts the gate’s deepness. From -20 dB to -100 dB. • COMPRESSOR: turns the compressor ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • COMP SENSITIVITY: sets the sensitivity of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • COMP OUT: sets the output level of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • CAB SIM: selects the cabinet simulator. CAB 1, CAB 2, CAB 3, CAB 4, BASS, OFF. 157 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet distorted signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE boosts the output signal to achieve more volume in certain parts during the performance. ON or OFF. 158 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models GREEN Based on Ibanez® Tube Screamer This is a model of the classic overdrive/distortion pedal, which has become the go to overdrive pedal for some of the most influential guitar players of all time. It helps to boost the mid frequencies keeping great transient response. Parameters: • DRIVE: increases the amount of clipping in the distortion circuit. From 0 to 10. • BASS: boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • VOLUME: sets the output level. From 0 to 10. • COLOR: controls the tone of the distortion. From 0 to 10. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parameter EQ from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • EQ POSITION: sets the tone EQ pre or post clipping. PRE or POST. • NOISE GATE: turns the noise gate ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • NG THRESHOLD: adjusts the sensitivity of the gate’s threshold. From -100 dB to 0 dB. • NG RELEASE: adjusts the time of the gate’s release. From 20 ms to 1500 ms. • NG DEPTH: adjusts the gate’s deepness. From -20 dB to -100 dB. • COMPRESSOR: turns the compressor ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • COMP SENSITIVITY: sets the sensitivity of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • COMP OUT: sets the output level of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • CAB SIM: selects the cabinet simulator. CAB 1, CAB 2, CAB 3, CAB 4, BASS, OFF. 159 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet distorted signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE boosts the output signal to achieve more volume in certain parts during the performance. ON or OFF 160 Stomp Box Effects Gear Models AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop DIODE Based on MXR® Distortion+ This model is perfect to pump up your amplifier from light overdrives to dense distortions. Parameters: • DRIVE: increases the amount of clipping in the distortion circuit. From 0 to 10. • BASS: boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • VOLUME: sets the output level. From 0 to 10. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parameter EQ from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • EQ POSITION: sets the tone EQ pre or post clipping. PRE or POST. • NOISE GATE: turns the noise gate ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • NG THRESHOLD: adjusts the sensitivity of the gate’s threshold. From -100 dB to 0 dB. • NG RELEASE: adjusts the time of the gate’s release. From 20 ms to 1500 ms. • NG DEPTH: adjusts the gate’s deepness. From -20 dB to -100 dB. • COMPRESSOR: turns the compressor ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • COMP SENSITIVITY: sets the sensitivity of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • COMP OUT: sets the output level of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • CAB SIM: selects the cabinet simulator. CAB 1, CAB 2, CAB 3, CAB 4, BASS, OFF. • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet distorted signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE boosts the output signal to achieve more volume in certain parts during the performance. ON or OFF. 161 Stomp Box Effects Gear Models AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop BLUE A very versatile model, which is the best fit for creamy jazz tones and crunchy blues lines. Parameters: • DRIVE: increases the amount of clipping in the distortion circuit. From 0 to 10. • BASS: boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • VOLUME: sets the output level. From 0 to 10. • COLOR: controls the tone of the distortion. From 0 to 10. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parameter EQ from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • EQ POSITION: sets the tone EQ pre or post clipping. PRE or POST. • NOISE GATE: turns the noise gate ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • NG THRESHOLD: adjusts the sensitivity of the gate’s threshold. From -100 dB to 0 dB. • NG RELEASE: adjusts the time of the gate’s release. From 20 ms to 1500 ms. • NG DEPTH: adjusts the gate’s deepness. From -20 dB to -100 dB. • COMPRESSOR: turns the compressor ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • COMP SENSITIVITY: sets the sensitivity of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • COMP OUT: sets the output level of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • CAB SIM: selects the cabinet simulator. CAB 1, CAB 2, CAB 3, CAB 4, BASS, OFF. • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet distorted signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. 162 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • X-MODE: the X-MODE boosts the output signal to achieve more volume in certain parts during the performance. ON or OFF. 163 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models BOOSTER A booster to increase the level of the instrument going into the amplifier in order to add harmonics and increase the overall saturation for solo parts and whenever your instrument needs to come up over the others. Parameters: • DRIVE: not available. • BASS: boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • VOLUME: boosts the overall output level. From 0 to 10. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parameter EQ from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • EQ POSITION: sets the tone EQ pre or post clipping. PRE or POST. • NOISE GATE: turns the noise gate ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • NG THRESHOLD: adjusts the sensitivity of the gate’s threshold. From -100 dB to 0 dB. • NG RELEASE: adjusts the time of the gate’s release. From 20 ms to 1500 ms. • NG DEPTH: adjusts the gate’s deepness. From -20 dB to -100 dB. • COMPRESSOR: turns the compressor ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • COMP SENSITIVITY: sets the sensitivity of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • COMP OUT: sets the output level of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • CAB SIM: selects the cabinet simulator. CAB 1, CAB 2, CAB 3, CAB 4, BASS, OFF. • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet distorted signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE boosts the output signal to achieve more volume in certain parts during the performance. ON or OFF. 164 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models H-BOOST A treble booster to increase the presence of the instrument in order to pump up the overall saturation and add some sparkling highs for solo parts and whenever your instrument needs to come up over the others. Parameters: • DRIVE: not available. • BASS: boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • VOLUME: boosts the overall output level. From 0 to 10. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parameter EQ from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • EQ POSITION: sets the tone EQ pre or post clipping. PRE or POST. • NOISE GATE: turns the noise gate ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • NG THRESHOLD: adjusts the sensitivity of the gate’s threshold. From -100 dB to 0 dB. • NG RELEASE: adjusts the time of the gate’s release. From 20 ms to 1500 ms. • NG DEPTH: adjusts the gate’s deepness. From -20 dB to -100 dB. • COMPRESSOR: turns the compressor ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • COMP SENSITIVITY: sets the sensitivity of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • COMP OUT: sets the output level of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • CAB SIM: selects the cabinet simulator. CAB 1, CAB 2, CAB 3, CAB 4, BASS, OFF. • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet distorted signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE boosts the output signal to achieve more volume in certain parts during the performance. ON or OFF. 165 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models CRUSH This model alters the sound of the input signal by changing the sample-rate, cutoff frequency and by distorting it. This effect can produce very aggressive distorted sounds, more pronounced than overdrive stomp boxes. The low-pass filter is very creative when combined with high distortion levels. Parameters: • DRIVE: increases the amount of clipping in the distortion circuit. From 0 to 10. • BASS: boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • VOLUME: sets the output level. From 0 to 10. • CUTOFF: controls the cut-off frequency for the low-pass filter. From 20 Hz to 20000. • DECIM: selects the sample rate ratio of the processed sound. From 1 to 15. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parameter EQ from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • EQ POSITION: sets the tone EQ pre or post clipping. PRE or POST. • NOISE GATE: turns the noise gate ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • NG THRESHOLD: adjusts the sensitivity of the gate’s threshold. From -100 dB to 0 dB. • NG RELEASE: adjusts the time of the gate’s release. From 20 ms to 1500 ms. • NG DEPTH: adjusts the gate’s deepness. From -20 dB to -100 dB. • COMPRESSOR: turns the compressor ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • COMP SENSITIVITY: sets the sensitivity of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • COMP OUT: sets the output level of the compressor. From 0 to 10. 166 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • CAB SIM: selects the cabinet simulator. CAB 1, CAB 2, CAB 3, CAB 4, BASS, OFF. • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet distorted signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE boosts the output signal to achieve more volume in certain parts during the performance. ON or OFF. 167 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models OCTOFUZZ Based on MXR® Blue Box™ Octave Fuzz This Fuzz/Octave stomp box adds a crazy fuzz to your signal and then duplicates it two octaves down. This is one of the most evil and overpowering models. Parameters: • DRIVE: adjusts the ratio of fuzzed signal with octaved signal. From 0 to 10. • BASS: boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • VOLUME: sets the output level. From 0 to 10. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parameter EQ from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • EQ POSITION: sets the tone EQ pre or post clipping. PRE or POST. • NOISE GATE: turns the noise gate ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • NG THRESHOLD: adjusts the sensitivity of the gate’s threshold. From -100 dB to 0 dB. • NG RELEASE: adjusts the time of the gate’s release. From 20 ms to 1500 ms. • NG DEPTH: adjusts the gate’s deepness. From -20 dB to -100 dB. • COMPRESSOR: turns the compressor ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • COMP SENSITIVITY: sets the sensitivity of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • COMP OUT: sets the output level of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • CAB SIM: selects the cabinet simulator. CAB 1, CAB 2, CAB 3, CAB 4, BASS, OFF. • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet distorted signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. 168 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • X-MODE: the X-MODE boosts the output signal to achieve more volume in certain parts during the performance. ON or OFF. 169 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models PURPLE Based on Roger Mayer™ Octavia This effect was first used on the early Jimi Hendrix songs. It is a fuzz box with frequency-doubling circuitry that produces a second note an octave above the fundamental note. This was first used on “Purple Haze” and “Fire”. Parameters: • DRIVE: adjusts the ratio of fuzzed signal with octaved signal. From 0 to 10. • BASS: boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • VOLUME: sets the output level. From 0 to 10. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parameter EQ from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • EQ POSITION: sets the tone EQ pre or post clipping. PRE or POST. • NOISE GATE: Turnsturns the noise gate ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • NG THRESHOLD: adjusts the sensitivity of the gate’s threshold. From -100 dB to 0 dB. • NG RELEASE: adjusts the time of the gate’s release. From 20 ms to 1500 ms. • NG DEPTH: adjusts the gate’s deepness. From -20 dB to -100 dB. • COMPRESSOR: turns the compressor ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • COMP SENSITIVITY: sets the sensitivity of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • COMP OUT: sets the output level of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • CAB SIM: selects the cabinet simulator. CAB 1, CAB 2, CAB 3, CAB 4, BASS, OFF. • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet distorted signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. 170 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • X-MODE: the X-MODE boosts the output signal to achieve more volume in certain parts during the performance. ON or OFF. 171 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models FUZZACE Based on Arbiter® Fuzz Face® This effect is modeled after a classic germanium transistor fuzz vintage effect. Typically used on lead guitar, this effect has remained a popular distortion effect throughout the years. Parameters: • DRIVE: increases the amount of clipping in the distortion circuit. From 0 to 10. • BASS: boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • VOLUME: sets the output level. From 0 to 10. • BIAS: regulates the fuzz BIAS. From 0 to 10. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parameter EQ from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • EQ POSITION: sets the tone EQ pre or post clipping. PRE or POST. • NOISE GATE: turns the noise gate ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • NG THRESHOLD: adjusts the sensitivity of the gate’s threshold. From -100 dB to 0 dB. • NG RELEASE: adjusts the time of the gate’s release. From 20 ms to 1500 ms. • NG DEPTH: adjusts the gate’s deepness. From -20 dB to -100 dB. • COMPRESSOR: turns the compressor ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • COMP SENSITIVITY: sets the sensitivity of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • COMP OUT: sets the output level of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • CAB SIM: selects the cabinet simulator. CAB 1, CAB 2, CAB 3, CAB 4, BASS, OFF. 172 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet distorted signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE boosts the output signal to achieve more volume in certain parts during the performance. • ON or OFF. 173 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models BIG-FUZZ Based on Electro-Harmonix® Big Muff Pi An iconic distortion pedal that has stood the test of time. Capable of tones from smooth sustain & compression to heavy buzz-saw distortion, this pedal is perfect for indie and alternative rock. Parameters: • DRIVE: increases the amount of clipping in the distortion circuit. From 0 to 10. • BASS: boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to +6 dB. • VOLUME: sets the output level. From 0 to 10. • COLOR: controls the tone of the distortion. From 0 to 10. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parameter EQ from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • EQ POSITION: sets the tone EQ pre or post clipping. PRE or POST. • NOISE GATE: turns the noise gate ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • NG THRESHOLD: adjusts the sensitivity of the gate’s threshold. From -100 dB to 0 dB. • NG RELEASE: adjusts the time of the gate’s release. From 20 ms to 1500 ms. • NG DEPTH: adjusts the gate’s deepness. From -20 dB to -100 dB. • COMPRESSOR: turns the compressor ON or OFF. ON or OFF. • COMP SENSITIVITY: sets the sensitivity of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • COMP OUT: sets the output level of the compressor. From 0 to 10. • CAB SIM: selects the cabinet simulator. CAB 1, CAB 2, CAB 3, CAB 4, BASS, OFF. 174 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet distorted signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE boosts the output signal to achieve more volume in certain parts during the performance. ON or OFF. 175 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models X-VIBE Modulation Models CHORUS 80 This model is inspired by the different attempted versions that came out in the ‘80s to recreate complex stereo chorus effects. This gives you the wideness and magic of the ‘80s rock sound. Parameters: • SPEED: sets the rate of the chorus effect. When the BPM SYNC is activated the SPEED parameter allows you to select the available Time Signatures. From 0% to 100% or from 1/32 to 1/1d when BPM SYNC is ON. • DEPTH: sets the intensity of the chorus effect. From 0% to 100%. • BASS: Boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parametric EQ, from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. 176 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • MID FREQ: Changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet modulated signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE sets the Chorus to a deeper modulation with a higher rate for a temporary extreme effect. ON or OFF. 177 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models CHORUS 1 Based on Solina String Ensemble Keyboard Chorus effect This vintage chorus is inspired by the widening chorus effect found in the Solina String Ensemble Keyboard that can fit perfectly also in guitar tones. Parameters: • SPEED: sets the rate of the chorus effect. From 0% to 100%. • DEPTH: sets the intensity of the chorus effect. From 0% to 100%. • BASS: Boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parametric EQ, from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: Changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet modulated signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE sets the Chorus to a deeper modulation with a higher rate for a temporary extreme effect. ON or OFF. 178 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models CHORUS X Based on Roland RS Series This is a very versatile model based on the chorus effect of the RS series of synthesizers by Roland that also became one of the preferred choruses for guitarists all over the world. Parameters: • SPEED: sets the rate of the chorus effect. From 0% to 100%. • DEPTH: sets the intensity of the chorus effect. From 0% to 100%. • BASS: Boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parametric EQ, from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: Changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet modulated signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE sets the Chorus to a deeper modulation with a higher rate for a temporary extreme effect. ON or OFF. 179 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 60 VIBE Based on Univox™ Uni-Vibe™ This model offers two working modes: chorus and vibrato. Its legendary chorus mode is a chorus/rotatingspeaker simulator that was introduced in 1969. This created a swirling effect quite similar to a rotary speaker cabinet, but with the addition of a continuous speed control. Parameters: • SPEED: sets the rate of the effect. When the BPM SYNC is activated the SPEED parameter allows you to select the available Time Signatures. From 0% to 100% or from 1/32 to 1/1d when BPM SYNC is ON. • DEPTH: sets the intensity of the effect. From 0% to 100%. • BASS: Boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • MODE: selects between the Chorus or Vibrato mode. CHORUS or VIBRATO. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parametric EQ, from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: Changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet modulated signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE sets the effect to a deeper modulation with a higher rate for a temporary extreme effect. ON or OFF. 180 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models PHAZER 9 Based on MXR® Phase 90 This effect is one of the most popular phase pedals of all times. Used by a wide range of first-class guitarists, this unit can add a little bit of shimmer to your solos or generate a smooth, watery effect while playing chords and muted strumming. Parameters • SPEED: sets the rate of the phaser effect. When the BPM SYNC is activated the SPEED parameter allows you to select the available Time Signatures. From 0% to 100% or from 1/32 to 1/1d when BPM SYNC is ON. • DEPTH: sets the intensity of the phaser effect. From 0% to 100%. • BASS: Boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parametric EQ, from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: Changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet modulated signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE sets the phaser to a deeper modulation with a higher rate for a temporary extreme effect. ON or OFF. 181 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models PHAZER 10 Based on MXR® Phaser 100 A model of a classic analog phaser that offers 4 different modes characterized by their different intensity and shape. Parameters: • SPEED: sets the rate of the phaser effect. When the BPM SYNC is activated the SPEED parameter allows you to select the available Time Signatures. From 0% to 100% or from 1/32 to 1/1d when BPM SYNC is ON. • DEPTH: sets the intensity of the effect. From 0% to 100%. • BASS: Boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • MODE: selects one of the four different phaser modes. From 1 to 4. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parametric EQ, from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: Changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet modulated signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE sets the phaser to a deeper modulation with a higher rate for a temporary extreme effect. ON or OFF. 182 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models PHAZER CL This model is inspired by one of the most iconic and classic analog phase shift effects heard throughout the 1970s. Parameters: • SPEED: sets the rate of the phaser effect. When the BPM SYNC is activated the SPEED parameter allows you to select the available Time Signatures. From 0% to 100% or from 1/32 to 1/1d when BPM SYNC is ON. • DEPTH: sets the intensity of the effect. From 0% to 100%. • BASS: Boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • COLOR: adjusts which frequencies are affected by the phasing action. From -10 to +10. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parametric EQ, from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: Changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet modulated signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE engages a higher depth and adds a resonant effects to the modulation ON or OFF. 183 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models FOX Based on fOXX® Foot Phaser An early vintage phaser with a unique and distinctive sound. In addition to the standard controls for a phaser, it offers a feedback parameter that lets you change the sound from a smooth phazy to an edgy modulated effect. Parameters: • SPEED: select between 4 fixed speeds. From 1 to 4. • DEPTH: sets the intensity of the phaser effect. From 0% to 100%. • BASS: Boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • FEEDBACK: controls the feedback of the phaser effect. From 0% to 100%. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parametric EQ, from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: Changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet modulated signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE engages a higher depth and adds a resonant effects to the modulation. ON or OFF. 184 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models STONE Based on Electro-Harmonix® Small Stone This effect is a model of a classic analog phase shifter, capable of a range of phaser effects from gentle to outlandish swirling effects. You may wonder why it is called “small” when you hear it. Parameters: • SPEED: sets the rate of the phaser effect. When the BPM SYNC is activated the SPEED parameter allows you to select the available Time Signatures. From 0% to 100% or from 1/32 to 1/1d when BPM SYNC is ON. • DEPTH: selects SOFT or HARD intensity. SOFT and HARD. • BASS: Boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parametric EQ, from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: Changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet modulated signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE sets the phaser to a deeper modulation with a higher rate for a temporary extreme effect. ON or OFF. 185 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models ELECTRIC Based on Electro-Harmonix® Electric Mistress This stomp box is a model of a vintage flanger/filter matrix used by many well-known guitarists to achieve classic sounds. While it has amazing warmth, it is also capable of very versatile chorus and ring modulation type sounds. Parameters: • SPEED: sets the rate of the flanger effect. When the BPM SYNC is activated the SPEED parameter allows you to select the available Time Signatures. From 0% to 100% or from 1/32 to 1/1d when BPM SYNC is ON. • DEPTH: sets the intensity of the flanger effect. From 0% to 100%. • BASS: Boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • COLOR: adjusts which frequencies are affected by the flanger. From 0 to 20. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parametric EQ, from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: Changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet modulated signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE sets the flanger to modulate the high-frequency range for a temporary extreme effect. ON or OFF. 186 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models DOUBLER Based on the doubler mode of the MXR® Flanger Doubler Primarily used to thicken in the overall tone of the instrument. Very popular in ‘90s power metal. Parameters: • SPEED: sets the rate of the effect. From 0% to 100%. • DEPTH: sets the intensity of the effect. From 0% to 100%. • BASS: Boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parametric EQ, from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: Changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet modulated signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE engages a higher depth and adds a crazy dizziness effects to the modulation. ON or OFF. 187 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models METALLIC Based on MXR® Flanger 117 A classic flanger reminiscent of the ‘80s flavor. Still, no flanger is more recognizable, making this perfect for hardrock and psychedelic clean tones. Parameters: • SPEED: sets the rate of the flanger effect. When the BPM SYNC is activated the SPEED parameter allows you to select the available Time Signatures. From 0% to 100% or from 1/32 to 1/1d when BPM SYNC is ON. • DEPTH: sets the intensity of the flanger effect. From 0% to 100%. • BASS: Boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • REGEN: sets the amount of feedback happening inside the flanger. From 0% to 100%. • MANUAL: sets the timbre of the flanging effect. From 0 to 10. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parametric EQ, from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: Changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet modulated signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE engages a higher depth and adds a resonant effects to the modulation. ON or OFF. 188 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models ROTARY This effect is a model of a rotary speaker cabinet. Rotary speaker cabinets create a lush vibrato/chorus effect that adds vibe and a tremendous third dimension to the sound. Parameters: • SPEED: sets the rate of the effect. When the BPM SYNC is activated the SPEED parameter allows you to select the available Time Signatures. From 0% to 100% or from 1/32 to 1/1d when BPM SYNC is ON. • DEPTH: sets the intensity of the effect. From 0% to 100%. • BASS: Boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • COLOR: sets the Balance between Drum and Horn. From -10 to +10. • DRIVE: sets the amount of saturation in the effect. From 0% to 100%. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parametric EQ, from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: Changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet modulated signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE engages the maximum speed and adds Drive to the response. ON or OFF. 189 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models TREMOLO A fully customizable tremolo effect that offers controls over the envelope and wave shape of the modulation allowing you to set it from a smooth swell flavor to a percussive effect. Parameters: • SPEED: sets the rate of the tremolo. When the BPM SYNC is activated the SPEED parameter allows you to select the available Time Signatures. From 0% to 100% or from 1/32 to 1/1d when BPM SYNC is ON. • DEPTH: sets the intensity of the tremolo. From 0% to 100%. • BASS: Boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • ENVELOPE: varies the tremolo rise and fall time (how fast or slow the volume increases and decreases) for unique percussion, “reverse decay” effects and everything in between. From 0 to 10. • WAVE: sets the wave form of the tremolo from a smooth sine wave (like vintage amps) to a choppier triangular wave to an abrupt “on/off” pulsing square wave. From 0 to 10. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parametric EQ, from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: Changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet modulated signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE engages the maximum depth and harshness. ON or OFF. 190 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models STEP SLICER Add programmed rhythmic parts to your power chords and phrases with this powerful and creative beat synced slicing stomp effect. It can be setup to create anything from the most amazing tremolos to the most complex rhythm effects that always stay in perfect sync with the beat. Parameters: • SPEED: sets the speed of the stepper. When the BPM SYNC is activated the SPEED parameter allows you to select the available Time Signatures. From 0% to 100% or from 1/32 to 1/1d when BPM SYNC is ON. • DEPTH: sets the steepness of the level change between steps. Set it at lower positions to get a smoother effect or set it to higher positions to get a more gate-like effect. From 0% to 100%. • BASS: Boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • SWING: Increase this control to give to the steps a swing type quantization. From 0% to 100%. • STEP 1-8: sets the level for each step. From 0% to 100%. • PAN 1-8: sets the pan for each step. From -10 to +10. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parametric EQ, from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: Changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet modulated signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE engages the maximum speed. ON or OFF. 191 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models STEP FILTER A powerful and deep beat-synced filter stomp effect. You can apply Low / High and Band pass analog modeled filtering on freely customizable patterns to add groove and rhythmic pulsing to your parts. This will make your guitar and bass parts sound like a rhythmic synth, if you want it! Parameters: • SPEED: sets the speed of the stepper. When the BPM SYNC is activated the SPEED parameter allows you to select the available Time Signatures. From 0% to 100% or from 1/32 to 1/1d when BPM SYNC is ON. • DEPTH: sets how deep the filter is modulated by the steps. From 0% to 100%. • BASS: Boosts and cuts the low frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies. From -6 dB to + 6 dB. • MODE: sets which kind of filter will be used: high pass, band pass or low pass. LOW, HIGH, BAND • CUTOFF: sets the center cut-off frequency of the filter. This is the cut-off frequency the filter will have when the steps are set to half position. From 40 Hz to 20000 Hz. • RES: sets the center resonance of the filter. This is the resonance amount the filter will have when the steps are set to half position. From 0 to 10. • SWING: increase this control to give the steps a swing type quantization. From 0% to 100%. • DEST: sets what is modulated by the steps between filter cut-off and/or filter resonance. At full minimum position only cut-off frequency is modulated, at max position only resonance is modulated. From 0 to 10. • STEP 1-8: sets the amount of modulation for each step. From 0% to 100%. • MID Q: sets the bandwidth of the mid parametric EQ, from narrow to wide. From 0.2 to 3. • MID FREQ: Changes the center frequency of the mid parametric EQ. From 80 Hz to 5000 Hz. • MIX: regulates the amount of the dry and wet modulated signal. By default the mix is set to 100% WET. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: engages a higher depth and adds a resonant effects to the modulation. ON or OFF. 192 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models X-TIME Delay Models VTG TAPE This model is a classic tape echo with wobble effect that can be controlled and manipulated for experimental lo-fi echo repeats, bringing extra creativity to any playing. It features all the typical tape echo characteristics and nuances to bring a real tape sound under your feet. Parameters: • TIME: controls the time of the delay repetitions. From 60 ms to 1429 ms or from 1/32 to 1/1d when BPM SYNC is ON. • FEEDBACK: controls the number of repetitions occurring in the delay. From 0% to 100%. • FILTER: controls the brightness of the delay repetitions. Turn it counterclockwise to have darker tones, clockwise to have brighter tones. From 0 to 10. • MOD: controls the amount of wow & flutter happening in the tape echo. From 0 to 10. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. 193 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • X-MODE: the X-MODE pushes the tape echo feedback to its edge. The level increases until is fully saturated. ON or OFF. 194 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models MOD TAPE IK’s Tape Echo recreates a modern echo sound with additional modulation controls over depth and speed to generate movement in the delay repeats, while maintaining all the typical characteristics that make the tape echo sound so sought-after. Parameters: • TIME: controls the time of the delay repetitions. From 60 ms to 2000 ms or from 1/32 to 1/1d when BPM SYNC is ON. • FEEDBACK: controls the number of repetitions occurring in the delay. From 0% to 100%. • FILTER: controls the low-pass filter frequency. Turn it counterclockwise to filter out the high frequencies or clockwise to get the full frequency spectrum. From 490 Hz to 19000 Hz. • MOD: controls the depth of the modulation. From 0% to 100% • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • MOD RATE: controls the modulation rate. From 0.1 Hz to 10 Hz • X-MODE: the X-MODE pushes the feedback to infinity and activates an additional tilt filter to bright up its tail. ON or OFF. 195 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models ANALOG This analog delay is harmonically rich and can be pushed to add color and the characteristic saturation of console preamplifiers, which blends perfectly with the direct sound coming from your instrument. Its sound can be shaped even further with its high-pass and low-pass filters. Parameters: • TIME: controls the time of the delay repetitions. From 60 ms to 2000 ms or from 1/32 to 1/1d when BPM SYNC is ON. • FEEDBACK: controls the number of repetitions occurring in the delay. From 0% to 100%. • FILTER: controls the amount of tilt filter being applied. Turn it counterclockwise to achieve darker tones or clockwise for brighter tones. The filter is being placed before the saturation stage to shape its characteristics and the way it reacts with the incoming sound. From -20 dB to +20 dB. • MOD: controls the amount of saturation being applied. From 0 dB to 20 dB • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • LOW PASS: controls the frequency for the low-pass filter. From 600 Hz to 19000 Hz. • HIGH PASS: controls the frequency for the high-pass filter. From 22 Hz to 500 Hz. • X-MODE: the X-MODE pushes the feedback to infinity and activates an LFO that modulates its tail. ON or OFF. 196 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models DIGITAL A crystal-clear digital delay sound, perfect for a high-fidelity wet signal. It also features a doubler mode to add width to delay tails, a great solution to widen up any sound and fill the entire stereo field. Parameters: • TIME: controls the time of the delay repetitions. From 60 ms to 2000 ms or from 1/32 to 1/1d when BPM SYNC is ON. • FEEDBACK: controls the number of repetitions occurring in the delay. From 0% to 100%. • FILTER: controls the low-pass filter frequency. Turn it counterclockwise to filter out the high frequencies or clockwise to get the full frequency spectrum. From 800 Hz to 20000 Hz. • MOD: selects the delay mode. ∙ NORMAL: a typical digital clean stereo in & stereo out delay. ∙ DOUBLER: the delay signal gets spread out the left & right channels for wide delay repeats. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE pushes the feedback to infinity. ON or OFF. 197 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models PING PONG This delay is designed to provide the perfect moving ping pong bouncing left and right. In addition to the standard ping pong pattern, it also features another mode for panning the repeats Left-Center-Right and add a groovy “circular” effect. Parameters: • TIME: controls the time of the delay repetitions. From 60 ms to 2000 ms or from 1/32 to 1/1d when BPM SYNC is ON. • FEEDBACK: controls the number of repetitions occurring in the delay. From 0% to 100%. • FILTER: controls the low-pass filter frequency. Turn it counterclockwise to filter out the high frequencies or clockwise to get the full frequency spectrum. From 800 Hz to 20000 Hz. • MOD: selects the delay mode. ∙ L-R: the iconic ping pong delay mode with repeats alternating left and right. ∙ L-C-R: a more sophisticated delay mode with repeats alternating left, center and right. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE pushes the feedback to infinity. ON or OFF. 198 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models PATTERN This is the perfect model to find inspiration. It features 16 different delay patterns to experiment with and find new rhythmic ideas. Parameters: • TIME: controls the time of the delay repetitions. In BPM SYNC ON the options are: 0: the BPM time is kept as is. 1: the BPM time is divided by 2 once. 2: the BPM time is divided by 2 twice. 3: the BPM time is divided by 2 three times. 4: the BPM time is divided by 2 four times. From 125 ms to 2000 ms or from 0 to 4 when BPM SYNC is ON. • FEEDBACK: controls the number of repetitions occurring in the delay. From 0% to 100%. • FILTER: controls the tilt filter amount. Turn it counterclockwise to filter out the high frequencies or clockwise to get the full frequency spectrum. From -20 dB to +20 dB. • MOD: selects the pattern among the 16 available. From 1 to 16. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • PAT FDBK: controls the number of repetitions of the whole pattern. From 0% to 100% • EQ LPF: sets the frequency for the low-pass filter. From 500 Hz to 19800 Hz. • EQ HPF: sets the frequency for the high-pass filter. From 22 Hz to 900 Hz. • EQ GAIN: sets the gain for the mid-band EQ. From -20 dB to +20 dB. • EQ FREQ: sets the frequency for the mid-band EQ. From 100 Hz to 15000 Hz. • EQ Q: sets the Q factor for the mid-band EQ. From 0.1 to 10. • X-MODE: the X-MODE pushes both feedback and pattern’s feedback to infinity. ON or OFF. 199 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models DUAL Two delays in one that can be set in series or in parallel to have an amazing stereo sound. The second delay reacts on the first one, but with independent mix, feedback and time that is expressed in ratios of the first delay’s time. Parameters: • TIME: controls the time of the first delay repetitions. From 60 ms to 2000 ms or from 1/32 to 1/1d when BPM SYNC is ON. • FEEDBACK: controls the number of repetitions occurring in the first delay. From 0% to 100%. • FILTER: controls the low-pass filter frequency. Turn it counterclockwise to filter out the high frequencies or clockwise to get the full frequency spectrum. From 800 Hz to 15000 Hz. • MOD: controls the mix of the second delay. From 0% to 100%. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • TIME 2: controls the time of the second delay expressed in ratios of the first delay. 1/8, 1/7, 1/6, 1/5, 1/4, 1/3, 1/2, 1/1, 2/7, 2/5, 2/3, 2/1, 3/8, 3/7, 3/4, 3/2, 3/1, 4/7, 4/5, 4/3, 4/1, 5/7, 5/6, 5/4, 5/3, 5/2, 5/1, 6/7, 6/5, 6/1, 7/8, 7/6, 7/5, 7/4, 7/3, 7/2, 7/1, 8/7, 8/5, 8/3, 8/1. • FDBK 2: controls the feedback for the second delay. From 0% to 100%. • MODE: ∙ SERIES: the two delays are placed in series. ∙ PARALLEL: the two delays are placed in parallel (one delay happens only on the left channel while the other happens only on the right channel). • X-MODE: the X-MODE pushes both feedbacks to infinity. ON or OFF. 200 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models REVERSE Amazing, reversed repeats that create wonderful delay tails. In addition to the reversed repeat, a non-reversed repeat can be blended in to maintain the groovy part of the delay pattern. Parameters: • TIME: controls the time of the delay repetitions. From 63 ms to 2000 ms or from 1/32 to 1/1d when BPM SYNC is ON. • FEEDBACK: controls the number of repetitions occurring in the delay. From 0% to 100%. • FILTER: controls the frequency response of the delay. Turn it counterclockwise to get darker tones or clockwise for brighter sounds. From 0 to 10. • MOD: controls the volume of the non-repeated tap that can be added to the reversed one. From 0 to 10. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: the X-MODE pushes the feedback to infinity. ON or OFF. 201 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models REV PONG This is an advanced ping pong delay effect. The delay sound is sent to a reverb that can be modulated. Also, the second tap of the ping pong pattern can be reversed to really get a very custom sound. Parameters: • TIME: controls the time of the delay repetitions. From 60 ms to 2000 ms or from 1/32 to 1/1d when BPM SYNC is ON. • FEEDBACK: controls the number of repetitions occurring in the delay. From 0% to 100%. • FILTER: controls the frequency response of the delay. Turn it counterclockwise to get darker tones or clockwise for brighter sounds. From 0 to 10. • MOD: controls the depth of the LFO happening on the reverb. From 0% to 100%. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • REVERB: controls the mix for the reverb applied to the delay. From 0% to 100%. • REVERSE: reverses the one of the two taps of the ping pong effect. ON or OFF. • LFO RATE: controls the rate of the LFO applied to the delay. From 0.5 Hz to 10 Hz. • X-MODE: the X-MODE pushes the feedback to infinity. ON or OFF. 202 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models SWELL Gentle and ambient swell delays to cream up slow lines. The swell effect has independent time and depth so it can be synced with the delay or pushed crazier to un-synced rates. Parameters: • TIME: controls the time of the delay repetitions. From 60 ms to 2000 ms or from 1/32 to 1/1d when BPM SYNC is ON. • FEEDBACK: controls the number of repetitions occurring in the delay. From 0% to 100%. • FILTER: controls the low-pass filter frequency. Turn it counterclockwise to get darker tones or clockwise get the full frequency spectrum. From 1000 Hz to 20000 Hz. • MOD: controls the depth of the swell effect. From 0 dB to -60 dB. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • SWL TIME: controls the time of the swell effect. From 10 ms to 1000 ms. • SWL SENS: adjusts the swell sensitivity level. From -50 dB to -12 dB. • X-MODE: the X-MODE pushes the feedback to infinity. ON or OFF. 203 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models DUCK A delay that makes it possible to have huge amounts of wet signal and feedback while retaining the dry signal focused on top by ducking down the delayed signal every time the dry signal is played. The release can be tweaked independently to add both slow and fast rises. Parameters: • TIME: controls the time of the delay repetitions. From 30 ms to 1450 ms or from 1/32 to 1/1d when BPM SYNC is ON. • FEEDBACK: controls the number of repetitions occurring in the delay. From 0% to 100%. • FILTER: controls the brightness of the delay. Turn it counterclockwise to get darker tones or clockwise get the full frequency spectrum. From 0 to 10. • MOD: controls the ducking compressor threshold. From -100 dB to 0 dB. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • RELEASE: controls the release of the ducking compressor. From 20 ms to 3000 ms. • X-MODE: the X-MODE pushes the feedback to infinity and makes the compression more aggressive. ON or OFF. 204 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models PITCH A delay that pitches up or down from the original tone to create pitched effects in the repeats. It features three pitched notes to get a triple-pitched effect and create a wall of lines in the delay by easily using one finger. Parameters: • TIME: controls the time of the first delay repetitions. From 0 ms to 2000 ms or from 1/32 to 1/1d when BPM SYNC is ON. • FEEDBACK: controls the number of repetitions occurring in the first delay. From 0% to 100%. • FILTER: controls the tilt filter gain for the first delay. Turn it counterclockwise to get darker tones or clockwise get the brighter frequency response. From -20 dB to +20 dB. • MOD: controls the pitch of the first delay. From -24 semitones to 24 semitones. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • LEVEL 2: controls the volume of the second delay. From 0 to 10. • TIME 2: controls the time of the second delay repetitions. From 0 ms to 2000 ms. • FDBK 2: controls the number of repetitions occurring in the second delay. From 0% to 100%. • FILTER 2: controls the tilt filter gain for the second delay. Turn it counterclockwise to get darker tones or clockwise get the full frequency spectrum. From -10 dB to +10 dB. • PITCH 2: controls the pitch of the second delay. From -24 semitones to 24 semitones. • PAN 2: controls the pan of the second delay in the stereo spectrum. From -1 to +1. • LEVEL 3: controls the volume of the third delay. From 0 to 10 • TIME 3: controls the time of the third delay repetitions. From 0 ms to 2000 ms. • FDBK 3: controls the number of repetitions occurring in the third delay. From 0% to 100%. • FILTER 3: controls the tilt filter gain for the third delay. Turn it counterclockwise to get darker tones or clockwise get the full frequency spectrum. From -10 dB to +10 dB. • PITCH 3: controls the pitch of the third delay. From -24 semitones to 24 semitones. 205 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • PAN 3: controls the pan of the third delay in the stereo spectrum. From -1 to +1. • EQ HPF: sets the frequency of the high-pass filter. From 22 Hz to 900 Hz. • EQ LPF: sets the frequency of the low-pass filter. From 500 Hz to 19800 Hz. • EQ GAIN: sets the gain of the mid-band EQ. From -20 dB to +20 dB. • EQ FREQ: sets the frequency of the mid-band EQ. From 100 Hz to 15000 Hz. • X-MODE: the X-MODE pushes the three feedbacks to infinity. ON or OFF. 206 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models HARM A delay that harmonizes up or down from the original tone to easily create delayed chords by playing just one note, thanks to its double harmonator. Harmonize any solo part by adding up to three harmonies that follow your lead. Parameters: • TIME: controls the time of the first delay repetitions. From 0 ms to 2000 ms or from 1/32 to 1/1d when BPM SYNC is ON. • FEEDBACK: controls the number of repetitions occurring in the first delay. From 0% to 100%. • FILTER: controls the tilt filter gain for the first delay. Turn it counterclockwise to get darker tones or clockwise get the full frequency spectrum. From -20 dB to +20 dB. • MOD: controls the pitch interval of the first delay. 1st ,2nd ,3rd ,4th ,5th ,6th ,7th, 8th. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • OCTAVE: selects the octave on which the first delay is harmonizing. From -2 octaves to +1 octave. • KEY: selects the key for the harmonizer. C/Am, Db/Bbm, D/Bm, Eb/Cm, E/C#m, F/Dm, Gb/Ebm, G/Em, Ab/Fm, A/F#m, Bb/Gm, B/G#m • LEVEL 2: controls the volume of the second delay. From 0 to 10 • TIME 2: controls the time of the second delay repetitions. From 0 ms to 2000 ms. • FDBK 2: controls the number of repetitions occurring in the second delay. From 0% to 100%. • FILTER 2: controls the tilt filter gain for the second delay. Turn it counterclockwise to get darker tones or clockwise get the full frequency spectrum. From -20 dB to +20 dB. • INTRVL 2: controls the pitch interval of the second delay. 1st ,2nd ,3rd ,4th ,5th ,6th ,7th, 8th. • OCTAVE 2: selects the octave on which the second delay is harmonizing. From -2 octaves to +1 octave. • PAN 2: controls the pan of the second delay in the stereo spectrum. From -1 to +1. • LEVEL 3: controls the volume of the third delay. From 0 to 10 • TIME 3: controls the time of the third delay repetitions. From 0 ms to 2000 ms. 207 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • FDBK 3: controls the number of repetitions occurring in the third delay. From 0% to 100%. • FILTER 3: controls the tilt filter gain for the third delay. Turn it counterclockwise to get darker tones or clockwise get the full frequency spectrum. From -20 dB to +20 dB. • INTRVL 3: controls the pitch interval of the third delay. 1st ,2nd ,3rd ,4th ,5th ,6th ,7th, 8th. • OCTAVE: selects the octave on which the third delay is harmonizing. From -2 octaves to +1 octave. • PAN 3: controls the pan of the third delay in the stereo spectrum. From -1 to +1. • EQ GAIN: sets the gain of the mid-band EQ. From -20 dB to +20 dB. • EQ FREQ: sets the frequency of the mid-band EQ. From 100 Hz to 15000 Hz. • A4 FREQ: sets the tuning for the A4 note. From 416 Hz to 466 Hz. • X-MODE: the X-MODE pushes the three feedbacks to infinity. ON or OFF. 208 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models DIRTY Get dirty with this saturated and distorted delay for edgy repeats and aggressive tails. It also features a phaser with independent speed and mix to really find the perfect grit and dirtiness in the delay lines. Parameters: • TIME: controls the time of the delay repetitions. From 60 ms to 2000 ms or from 1/32 to 1/1d when BPM SYNC is ON. • FEEDBACK: controls the number of repetitions occurring in the delay. From 0% to 100%. • FILTER: controls the low-pass filter frequency. Turn it counterclockwise to get darker tones or clockwise get the full frequency spectrum. From 790 Hz to 20000 Hz. • MOD: controls the dry/wet for the phaser effect. From 0% to 100%. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • DIRT: pushes the input to the delay increasing the distortion effect. From 0 dB to +40 dB. • SPEED: controls the speed of the phaser effect, From 0 to 10. • X-MODE: the X-MODE pushes the feedback to infinity. ON or OFF. 209 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models SLAPBACK Bring back the ’50s with this incredible slap back delay, which also features a modulated filter to move your slapbacks in the stereo spectrum to transform this classy sound into a modern delay effect. This model can’t activate the BPM SYNC option since it is only set using milliseconds. Parameters: • TIME: controls the time of the delay repetitions. From 40 ms to 120 ms. • FEEDBACK: controls the number of repetitions occurring in the delay. From 0% to 100%. • FILTER: controls the brightness of the delay. Turn it counterclockwise to get darker tones or clockwise get the full frequency spectrum. From 0 to 10. • MOD: controls the stereo LFO moving the delay left & right. From 0 to 10. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • RATE: controls the LFO rate. From 0.1 Hz to 5.0 Hz. • X-MODE: the X-MODE pushes the feedback to infinity and raises the LFO resonance. ON or OFF. 210 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models ARCTIC This delay is full of lush and never-ending tails. The delay is sent to a flanger and then to a shimmer with a customizable pitched voice to get very modulated and ethereal in any shape of form. This creates very modern delay trails great for ambient sounds. Parameters: • TIME: controls the time of the delay repetitions. From 62 ms to 1092 ms or from 1/32 to 1/1d when BPM SYNC is ON. • FEEDBACK: controls the number of repetitions occurring in the delay. From 0% to 100%. • FILTER: controls the brightness of the delay. Turn it counterclockwise to get darker tones or clockwise get the full frequency spectrum. From 0 to 10. • MOD: controls the mix for the flanger effect. From 0% to 100%. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • SHIMMER: controls the amount of shimmer reverb wetting the delay. From 0 to 10. • SIZE: controls the size of the shimmer reverb and the timing of the shift effect. From 0 to 10. • SHFT VOL: controls the volume of the shift effect. From 0 to 10. • SHIFT: sets the pitch for the shift effect. From -12 semitones to +12 semitones. • X-MODE: the X-MODE pushes the feedback to infinity and the reverb size and mix to max. ON or OFF. 211 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models X-SPACE Reverb Models SHIMMER 1 A complex shimmer that offers increasing feedback. The pitch can go from 1/4 semitone up to an octave creating many different customizable shifting voicings. Parameters: • TIME: controls the reverb tail length. From 5 s to 20 s. • PRE-DELAY: not available. • COLOR: controls the frequency response of the reverb. At minimum the reverb gets darker, at maximum the reverb gets brighter. Set in the middle the reverb is flat. From -10 to +10. • MOD: controls the amount of modulation of the reverb. From 0% to 100%. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. 212 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • SHIFT: controls the pitch of the note generated by the shimmer. It can be set to perfect pitch or fine-tuned with 1/8 of a tone. From -12 semitones to +12 semitones. • SIZE: controls the dimension of the ambience from which the reverb is generated. With size set to minimum the pitch build up is quicker, set to max the pitch build up is slower. From 50% to 150%. • MOD RATE: controls the rate of the reverb modulation. From 0.1 Hz to 7 Hz. • MODE: chooses among 3 modes. ∙ NO PICH: offers the shimmer characteristics without the feedback build up. ∙ SINGLE: the pitch of the feedback keeps building up according to the SHIFT parameter. ∙ DUAL: the pitch of the feedback keeps building up according to the SHIFT parameter both upwards and downwards. • X-MODE: engages the most possible tail length. ON or OFF. 213 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models SHIMMER 2 Shimmer 2 differs from the first one because there is no buildup in the feedback and the two different pitched voices can be set in parallel to create custom harmonizations. Parameters: • TIME: controls the reverb tail length. From 6 s to 20 s. • PRE-DELAY: not available. • COLOR: controls the frequency response of the reverb. At minimum the reverb gets darker, at maximum the reverb gets brighter. Set in the middle the reverb is flat. From -10 to +10. • MOD: controls the amount of modulation of the reverb. From 0% to 100%. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • SHIFT 1: controls the pitch of the note generated by the shimmer of the first voice. It can be set to perfect pitch or fine-tuned with 1/8 of a tone. From -12 semitones to +12 semitones. • GAIN 1: controls the level of the first voice. From 0 to 10. • SHIFT 2: controls the pitch of the note generated by the shimmer of the second voice. It can be set to perfect pitch or fine-tuned with 1/8 of a tone. From -12 semitones to +12 semitones. • GAIN 2: controls the level of the second voice. From 0 to 10. • SIZE: controls the dimension of the ambience from which the reverb is generated. From 50% to 150%. • MOD RATE: controls the rate of the reverb modulation. From 0.1 Hz to 7 Hz. • MODE: chooses among 3 modes. ∙ DUAL: the shimmer offers both pitched voices. ∙ SINGLE: the shipper offers only the first pitched voice. ∙ NO PITCH: the shimmer offers its characteristics without the pitched voices. • X-MODE: engages the most possible tail length. ON or OFF. 214 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models HALL This model recreates the ambience of a live concert hall with controlled decay and a reverb time range from 1 to 9 seconds to replicate from smaller venues up to larger clubs. With an advanced parameter set that features a 3-band decay trimmer, the sound of the hall can be highly tweaked to always find the perfect tail in which to place the instrument. Parameters: • TIME: controls the reverb tail length. From 1 s to 9 s. • PRE-DELAY: controls the pre-delay amount. From 0 ms to 1000 ms. • COLOR: controls the frequency response of the reverb. At minimum the reverb gets darker, at maximum the reverb gets brighter. Set in the middle the reverb is flat. From -10 to +10. • MOD: controls the amount of modulation of the reverb. From 0% to 100%. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • HPF: controls the cut-off frequency of the high-pass filter. From 22 Hz to 1000 Hz. • MOD RATE: controls the rate of the reverb modulation. From 0.1 Hz to 7 Hz. • SIZE: controls the dimension of the ambience from which the reverb is generated. From 50% to 150%. • L DECAY: controls the low-frequency band decay. From -10 to 10. • M DECAY: controls the mid-frequency band decay. From -10 to 10. • H DECAY: controls the high-frequency band decay. From -10 to 10. • X-MODE: engages the most possible tail length. ON or OFF. 215 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models ROOM This model adds the third dimension of a room to the direct sound in order to place it in a physical space and obtain a more natural sounding performance. Thanks to the 3-band decay trimmer any room can be recreated giving infinite possibilities. Its time range goes from 0.2 to 3 seconds offering a great option for a reverb that adds character without noticing the reverb itself. Parameters: • TIME: controls the reverb tail length. From 0.2 s to 3 s. • PRE-DELAY: controls the pre-delay amount. From 0 ms to 1000 ms. • COLOR: controls the frequency response of the reverb. At minimum the reverb gets darker, at maximum the reverb gets brighter. Set in the middle the reverb is flat. From -10 to +10. • MOD: controls the amount of modulation of the reverb. From 0% to 100%. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • HPF: controls the cut-off frequency of the high-pass filter. From 22 Hz to 1000 Hz. • MOD RATE: controls the rate of the reverb modulation. From 0.1 Hz to 7 Hz. • SIZE: controls the dimension of the ambience from which the reverb is generated. From 50% to 150%. • L DECAY: controls the low-frequency band decay. From -10 to 10. • M DECAY: controls the mid-frequency band decay. From -10 to 10. • H DECAY: controls the high-frequency band decay. From -10 to 10. • X-MODE: engages the most possible tail length. ON or OFF. 216 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models CHAMBER This model offers the typical chamber sound found in many professional recording studios and provides a highly reflected and bright tail that’s perfect for aggressive reverb tones. Its time range goes from 0.6 to 3 seconds like the hall model, but the chamber has way more character and vibe. Parameters: • TIME: controls the reverb tail length. From 0.6 s to 3 s. • PRE-DELAY: controls the pre-delay amount. From 0 ms to 1000 ms. • COLOR: controls the frequency response of the reverb. At minimum the reverb gets darker, at maximum the reverb gets brighter. Set in the middle the reverb is flat. From -10 to +10. • MOD: controls the amount of modulation of the reverb. From 0% to 100%. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • HPF: controls the cut-off frequency of the high-pass filter. From 22 Hz to 1000 Hz. • MOD RATE: controls the rate of the reverb modulation. From 0.1 Hz to 7 Hz. • SIZE: controls the dimension of the ambience from which the reverb is generated. From 50% to 150%. • L DECAY: controls the low-frequency band decay. From -10 to 10. • M DECAY: controls the mid-frequency band decay. From -10 to 10. • H DECAY: controls the high-frequency band decay. From -10 to 10. • X-MODE: engages the most possible tail length. ON or OFF. 217 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models CHURCH This model has the longest tail in order to reproduce the typical reverb sound found in churches. Its reverb time has a range from 3 to 20 seconds to replicate from the smallest chapel to the biggest cathedrals. Parameters: • TIME: controls the reverb tail length. From 3 s to 20 s. • PRE-DELAY: controls the pre-delay amount. From 100 ms to 1000 ms. • COLOR: controls the frequency response of the reverb. At minimum the reverb gets darker, at maximum the reverb gets brighter. Set in the middle the reverb is flat. From -10 to +10. • MOD: controls the amount of modulation of the reverb. From 0% to 100%. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • HPF: controls the cut-off frequency of the high-pass filter. From 22 Hz to 1000 Hz. • MOD RATE: controls the rate of the reverb modulation. From 0.1 Hz to 7 Hz. • SIZE: controls the dimension of the ambience from which the reverb is generated. From 50% to 200%. • L DECAY: controls the low-frequency band decay. From -10 to 10. • M DECAY: controls the mid-frequency band decay. From -10 to 10. • H DECAY: controls the high-frequency band decay. From -10 to 10. • X-MODE: engages the most possible tail length. ON or OFF. 218 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models PLATE This model can recreate different iconic plate reverbs. Its time has a range from 0.5 to 5 seconds and the flavor is highly customizable through custom parameters, which let you emulate different types of plates by emphasizing the decay of certain frequencies and dampening others. Parameters: • TIME: controls the reverb tail length. From 0.5 s to 5 s. • PRE-DELAY: controls the pre-delay amount. From 0 ms to 1000 ms. • COLOR: controls the frequency response of the reverb. At minimum the reverb gets darker, at maximum the reverb gets brighter. Set in the middle the reverb is flat. From -10 to +10. • MOD: controls the amount of modulation of the reverb. From 0% to 100%. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • HPF: controls the cut-off frequency of the high-pass filter. From 22 Hz to 1000 Hz. • MOD RATE: controls the rate of the reverb modulation. From 0.1 Hz to 7 Hz. • SIZE: controls the dimension of the ambience from which the reverb is generated. From 50% to 200%. • L DECAY: controls the low-frequency band decay. From -10 to 10. • M DECAY: controls the mid-frequency band decay. From -10 to 10. • H DECAY: controls the high-frequency band decay. From -10 to 10. • X-MODE: engages the most possible tail length. ON or OFF. 219 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models SPRING This is a customizable spring reverb model, which emulates the vintage spring modules typically installed on guitar amplifiers. Parameters: • TIME: controls the reverb tail length. From 0.2 s to 4 s. • PRE-DELAY: controls the pre-delay amount. From 0 ms to 1000 ms. • COLOR: controls the frequency response of the reverb. At minimum the reverb gets darker, at maximum the reverb gets brighter. Set in the middle the reverb is flat. From -10 dB to +10 dB. • MOD: controls the amount of modulation of the reverb. From 0% to 100%. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • HPF: controls the cut-off frequency of the high-pass filter. From 22 Hz to 1000 Hz. • MOD RATE: controls the rate of the reverb modulation. From 0.1 Hz to 7 Hz. • HI DAMP: controls the dampness of the high-frequency diffusion. From 0% to 100%. • WIDTH: controls the stereo spread of the reverb. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: engages the most possible tail length. ON or OFF. 220 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models SWELL This is a swell processor that can automatically create fantastic fading swell effects followed by a customizable reverb trail to create dreaming pads or string-like sounds. Parameters: • TIME: controls the reverb tail length. From 1 s to 4 s. • PRE-DELAY: sets the length of the swell cycle. From 10 ms to 3000 ms. • COLOR: controls the frequency response of the reverb. At minimum the reverb gets darker, at maximum the reverb gets brighter. Set in the middle the reverb is flat. From -10 dB to +10 dB. • MOD: controls the amount of modulation of the reverb. From 0% to 100%. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • HPF: controls the cut-off frequency of the high-pass filter. From 22 Hz to 1000 Hz. • MOD RATE: controls the rate of the reverb modulation. From 0.1 Hz to 7 Hz. • SWELL DEPTH: sets the depth of the volume swell. By default, the depth is at max position, meaning that the volume will start from silence. By lowering this control you’ll set the effect to start the swell phase from a level which is higher than silence, up to min position that sets the effect to have no action. From -90 dB to 0. • SWELL SENS: this control sets the sensitivity for the swell to recognize a new note or chord and therefore start a new swell cycle. Set it higher if you want the swell cycle to start even at the beginning of softer passages or set it lower if you want the swell cycle to only start for louder strikes. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: engages the most possible tail length. ON or OFF. 221 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models GATE This is a customizable gated reverb that cuts off the reverb trail as desired in order to add textured groove to your playing. Parameters: • TIME: controls the reverb tail length. From 0 s to 0.6 s. • PRE-DELAY: controls the pre-delay amount. From 0 ms to 1000 ms. • COLOR: controls the frequency response of the reverb. At minimum the reverb gets darker, at maximum the reverb gets brighter. Set in the middle the reverb is flat. From -10 dB to +10 dB. • MOD: controls the amount of modulation of the reverb. From 0% to 100%. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • HPF: controls the cut-off frequency of the high-pass filter. From 22 Hz to 1000 Hz. • MOD RATE: controls the rate of the reverb modulation. From 0.5 Hz to 10 Hz. • SIZE: controls the dimension of the ambience from which the reverbs is generated. From 0% to 100%. • X-MODE: engages the maximum time and size producing a dramatic timbre change. ON or OFF. 222 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models REVERSE This model is perfect to create reverse delay trails that fade in while you are playing. The reverse envelope can be set to 3 different modes to better fit the part. Parameters: • TIME: controls the reverb tail length. From 0% to 100%. • PRE-DELAY: controls the pre-delay amount. From 0 ms to 1000 ms. • COLOR: controls the frequency response of the reverb. At minimum the reverb gets darker, at maximum the reverb gets brighter. Set in the middle the reverb is flat. From -10 dB to +10 dB. • MOD: controls the amount of modulation of the reverb. From 0% to 100%. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • TYPE: chooses from the three available reverse shapes to achieve the desired flavour. From 1 to 3. • SIZE: controls the dimension of the ambience from which the reverb is generated. From 50% to 150%. • MOD RATE: controls the rate of the reverb modulation. From 0.5 Hz to 10 Hz. • HPF: controls the cut-off frequency of the high-pass filter. From 22 Hz to 1000 Hz. • X-MODE: engages the most possible tail length. ON or OFF. 223 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models EARY REF This model emulates the typical short reflections that can be heard in a small room or space. It’s fully customizable to bring it from a sort of traditional delay to a buzzing early reflection sound. Parameters: • TIME: controls the reverb tail length. From 0.1 s to 0.8 s. • PRE-DELAY: controls the pre-delay amount. From 0 ms to 100 ms. • COLOR: controls the frequency response of the reverb. At minimum the reverb gets darker, at maximum the reverb gets brighter. Set in the middle the reverb is flat. From -10 dB to +10 dB. • MOD: controls the amount of modulation of the reverb. From 0% to 100%. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • HPF: controls the cut-off frequency of the high-pass filter. From 22 Hz to 1000 Hz. • MOD RATE: controls the rate of the reverb modulation. From 0.1 Hz to 7 Hz. • SIZE: controls the dimension of the ambience from which the reverbs is generated. From 50% to 200%. • X-MODE: engages the most possible tail length. ON or OFF. 224 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models EXTREME This is a combination of two processors in one model. One is a plate reverb that gets modulated by the second one, which is a vintage phaser to add extreme modulated tails. Parameters: • TIME: controls the reverb tail length. From 0.8 s to 12 s. • PRE-DELAY: controls the pre-delay amount. From 0 ms to 1000 ms. • COLOR: controls the frequency response of the reverb. At minimum the reverb gets darker, at maximum the reverb gets brighter. Set in the middle the reverb is flat. From -10 dB to +10 dB. • MOD: controls the amount of modulation of the reverb. From 0% to 100%. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • MOD RATE: controls the rate of the reverb modulation. From 0 to 100. • X-MODE: engages the most possible tail length. ON or OFF. 225 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models ETHEREAL This is a highly modulated plate that recreates moving airy trails and adds magic to your lines. Parameters: • TIME: controls the reverb tail length. From 6 s to 18 s. • PRE-DELAY: controls the pre-delay amount. From 0 ms to 1000 ms. • COLOR: controls the frequency response of the reverb. At minimum the reverb gets darker, at maximum the reverb gets brighter. Set in the middle the reverb is flat. From -10 dB to +10 dB. • MOD: controls the amount of modulation of the reverb. From 0% to 100%. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • MOD RATE: controls the rate of the reverb modulation. From 0.1 Hz to 7 Hz. • HPF: controls the cut-off frequency of the high-pass filter. From 22 Hz to 1000 Hz. • X-MODE: engages the most possible tail length. ON or OFF. 226 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models BLOOM This reverb makes your simple lead parts bloom up and become very rich and noticeable. It is a swell like effect to give movement and vibe to your parts. Parameters: • TIME: controls the reverb tail length. From 4 s to 12 s. • PRE-DELAY: controls the pre-delay amount. From 0% to 100%. • COLOR: controls the frequency response of the reverb. At minimum the reverb gets darker, at maximum the reverb gets brighter. Set in the middle the reverb is flat. From -10 dB to +10 dB. • MOD: controls the amount of modulation of the reverb. From 0% to 100%. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • DIFFUSION: controls the diffusion of the reverb adding fullness and width. From 0% to 100%. • MOD RATE: controls the rate of the reverb modulation. From 0.1 Hz to 7 Hz. • X-MODE: engages the most possible tail length. ON or OFF. 227 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models MAGNETIC This is a spatial reverb that has an airy tone with an accentuated modulation effect, which at low rates creates an effect of space floating. Parameters: • TIME: controls the reverb tail length. From 0.8 s to 12 s. • PRE-DELAY: controls the pre-delay amount. From 0 ms to 1000 ms. • COLOR: controls the frequency response of the reverb. At minimum the reverb gets darker, at maximum the reverb gets brighter. Set in the middle the reverb is flat. From -10 dB to +10 dB. • MOD: controls the amount of modulation of the reverb. From 0% to 100%. • MIX: controls the balance of dry and wet signal. At 0% the signal is fully dry while at 100% the signal is fully wet. At around 85% the dry and wet signal have the same level. From 0% to 100%. • MOD RATE: controls the rate of the reverb modulation. From 0 to 100. • MOD COLOR: set the frequency zone where the modulation is acting. From -10 to +10. • X-MODE: engages the most possible tail length. ON or OFF. 228 Stomp Box Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Amplifiers AmpliTube Clean American Clean MKIII Based on Mesa/Boogie® Mark III™ Combo (Clean Channel) This is a model of the clean channel from a popular and sought after American amplifier. The signature tone can be heard on many albums and many stages around the world. Experience a sparkling clean with the capability for a touch of crunch when cranked up. This beautiful amp is crystal clear but can also deliver edgy sounds by pushing the Master volume, and can deliver a nice preamp crunch tone when Rhythm 2 is engaged. This amp is extremely versatile you can really get many types of clean or edgy tones from its incredibly flexible preamplifier. By selecting two different preamp shapes (Rhythm 2), and by adapting the tone with the Shift and Deep switches, you can really shape your clean/edgy sound in almost all possible ways. Add the final 5 band graphic EQ and the tonal possibilities are really wide. But be careful, this is not a ‘set and forget’ amp. Being it extremely versatile it can of course be set to a tone that could be totally far from what is needed on that part. It needs a degree of experimentation and experience before you can really master it! 229 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Controls: • VOLUME: sets the volume of the clean preamp. Push it closer to 10 for an edgy sound that starts to crunch. • BRIGHT: boosts brilliance of the preamp, especially when the Volume control is kept low. • TREBLE: sets the amount of high frequencies on the sound. • SHIFT: modifies the frequencies where the Bass control works. • BASS: sets the amount of low frequencies on the sound. • MIDDLE: sets the amount of mid frequencies on the sound. • MASTER: determines the level that is sent to the power amp. Turning this knob up, makes the power amp to saturate and produce great crunch sounds. • RHYTHM 2: when enabled the preamp has more gain, and it is therefore possible to obtain extremely musical and sweet crunch sounds. • DEEP: when enabled the bass response of the amplifier is extended. • EQ: enables the graphic EQ. • EQ BANDS: these sliders can control the equalization of the amp on 5 distinct frequencies areas. You’ll find it extremely musical and a powerful sound sculpting tool. • PRESENCE: when turned up the amp becomes more present and brighter. • REVERB: controls the amount of reverb coming from the internal spring unit. 230 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models American Tube Clean 1 Based on Fender® Super Reverb® This amp is modeled after a classic American guitar amp. This amp is great for clean to dirty sounds, making it ideal for clean and crunchy rhythm, rock, country, blues, and anything else requiring a clean amp capable of getting a little dirty when the music calls for it. Controls: • • • • • • 231 BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. PRESENCE: boost the high frequencies of the EQ stage, from 1 to 10. SPRING REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound, from 1 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage, from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models American Tube Clean 2 Based on Fender® DeLuxe Reverb® ’65 This model features yet another classic American amplifier. Unlike the American Tube Clean 1, this model is a smaller combo amp. This amp delivers a clean yet warm tone. Controls: • • • • • • 232 BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. PRESENCE: boost the high frequencies of the EQ stage, from 1 to 10. SPRING REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound, from 1 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage, from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Custom Solid State Clean This amp model is clean. It provides a very uncolored signal, perfect for jazz. It could be compared to amps like the Jazz Amp 120, ideal for sparkling clean tones. Controls: • • • • • 233 BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. PRESENCE: boost the high frequencies of the EQ stage, from 1 to 10. SPRING REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound, from 1 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage, from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Jazz Amp 120 Based on Roland® JC-120™ It may have Jazz in its name, but this versatile clean sound can be heard in many genres. Many of the top metal players keep this not-so-secret weapon in the studio for great clean sounds. Its sonic feature is the fantastic built-in analog chorus and vibrato unit that really made this amp a classic. Important: this amp contains a built-in stereo Chorus/Vibrato unit. To actually be able to hear this in stereo you will need to use two microphones in front of its Cabinet and pan the wide L – R. For more information about how to set this, see Chapter 9.5.7. Controls: • BRIGHT: boosts brilliance of the preamp, especially when the Volume control is kept low. • VOLUME: sets the overall amp volume. The amp remains clean up to volume 3 or 4 and starts distorting for higher positions. • DISTORTION: turning this knob up from the minimum position by a little bit turns On the distortion circuit. From there, continuing rising the control brings more and more distortion. • REVERB: controls the amount of reverb. • TREBLE: sets the amount of high frequencies on the sound. • MIDDLE: sets the amount of mid frequencies on the sound. • BASS: sets the amount of low frequencies on the sound. • VIB/OFF/CHORUS: this is a three position switch; ∙ When set to Off, the sound will not be affected by chorus or vibrato. ∙ When set to Vib, vibrato will be turned On. 234 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models ∙ When set to Chorus, chorus will be turned On. • SPEED: sets the speed of the Vibrato effect. Note that Chorus has no settings. • DEPTH: sets the intensity of the Vibrato effect. Note that Chorus has no settings. 235 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Metal Clean T Based on Mesa/Boogie® Triple Rectifier® (Clean Channel) This extremely high-quality amplifier delivers a very detailed and clean response on the clean channel. Incredibly well defined, it’s the perfect starting point for any kind of sound. Use this channel to get your hyper- driven sounds from stomps only, as well as for creating clean or edgy sounds. Controls: • • • • • • • 236 GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 1 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. PRESENCE: boost the high frequencies of the EQ stage, from 1 to 10. SPRING REVERB: Sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound, from 1 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage, from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube Crunch American Tube Vintage Based on Fender® Bassman® This classic American amplifier was at first designed to be a bass amp, but later became one of the most popular American guitar amps ever made. Great for clean tones, it is also versatile in a variety of music genres and playing styles. Controls: • • • • • • 237 BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. PRESENCE: boost the high frequencies of the EQ stage, from 1 to 10. SPRING REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound, from 1 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage, from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Brit Valve Pre Based on Marshall® JMP-1™ tube preamp The JMP-1 was Marshall’s first foray into the world of MIDI control with Marshall tone. It allows players to sculpt the tones they want, then save those tone presets for recall by MIDI control at any time. It’s one of the simplest preamps, very straightforward. It has the staple Marshall controls like Volume, Gain, Bass, Middle, Treble and Presence. It features a bass shift, 2 overdrive channels, and 2 clean channels. For its ease of use and its “readyto-go” sound character, it quickly became one of the most iconic Guitar preamps of the era. Almost 90% of the pro players at the time had a JMP-1 in their rack of toys. Controls: • DATA DISPLAY: Shows the value of the selected parameter. • DATA knob: decreases, increases the value of the selected parameter. • GAIN: selects the input gain parameter. • BASS: selects the Bass parameter. • MIDDLE: selects the Middle parameter. • TREBLE: selects the Treble parameter. • PRESENCE: selects the Presence parameter. • OD1: engages the overdrive 1 channel. • OD2: engages the overdrive 2 channel. • BASS SHIFT: enhances the Bass frequencies. • CLEAN 1: engages the Clean 1 channel. • CLEAN 2: engages the Clean 2 channel. • OUTPUT LEVEL: adjusts the final output level of the unit from 0 to 10. 238 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models British Blue Tube 30TB Based on Vox® AC30™ Top Boost - Blue Panel This is a model of a legendary British amplifier, which is one of the most widely recognizable and popular amps of all time. Throughout its life, its legendary tone helped to put many of rock’s founding fathers (including 4 guys from Liverpool) on the map and has been a highly sought-after sound that is still heard on many albums today. Controls: • • • • • 239 BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. CUT: as on the original, cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage when turned down. SPRING REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound, from 1 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage, from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models British Copper 30TB Based on Vox® AC30™ - Copper Panel Take yourself back to the ‘60s with this quintessential amp. Not just any version, but an accurate model of the well-known and loved version of an already spectacular amplifier. If you want some British sound, you can find it here. The original copper panel model was non-top boost, and you can find it exactly replicated here when the switch Top Boost is Off. Turn it On to add the top boost circuit in a second and be then able to adjust your sound with Bass and Treble pots. Controls: • NORMAL: sets the volume level for the Normal channel. Normal channel has a mellower response when compared to the Brilliant channel. • BRILLIANT: sets the volume level for the Brilliant channel. • VIB -TREM: sets the volume level for the Vibrato and Tremolo channel. • TOP BOOST: adds the Top Boost circuit in the Brilliant channel signal path. Normal and Vib-Trem channels are not affected by this. • BASS: adjusts the level of low frequencies in the sound. Active only on Brilliant channel and only when Top Boost is On. • TREBLE: adjust the level of high frequencies in the sound. Active only on Brilliant channel and only when Top Boost is On. • TONE: sets the overall brightness of the amp. It is always active, on all channels. When set to Min the amp is bright, when set to Max the amp is mellower. • SPEED: sets the speed of the Tremolo or Vibrato effect. • SWITCH: determines if the Vib-Trem channel will produce a Vibrato or a Tremolo effect. 240 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models HiAmp Based on Hiwatt® DR103™ Head HiAmp is based on one of the most legendary British tube amplifiers. This amp’s full-bodied, warm sound characterized countless music productions and performances in the 70s and early 80s. The amp was highly valued for its warm clean and its powerful crunch tones. Controls: • • • • • • • • 241 NORMAL/BRIGHT: selects normal or bright channel. NORMAL VOLUME: adjusts the input gain of the normal channel preamp stage from 1 to 10. BRIGHT VOLUME: adjusts the input gain of the bright channel preamp stage from 1 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. PRESENCE: determines the amount of high-end frequencies, from 1 to 10. MASTER VOLUME: adjust the global level, from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Tube Vintage Combo Based on Supro® Late ‘50s combo This is a model of a small vintage amplifier that was basic in design, but big in tone. This model is simple but sweet. Controls: • PRESENCE: cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stages when turned down. • SPRING REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound, from 1 to 10. • VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage, from 1 to 10. 242 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube Lead American Lead MKIII Based on Mesa/Boogie® Mark III™ Combo (Lead Channel) This is the lead channel of a renowned three-channel American amplifier, known for excelling at both clean and lead sounds. This channel can be big and aggressive when you want some California crunch and you can get smooth, tasty sustained lead sounds too. This amp is extremely versatile, you can really get almost any type of sound from its incredibly flexible preamplifier. By calibrating the various gain stages (Volume -> Lead Drive -> Master), by selecting two different preamp shapes (Rhythm 2), and by adapting the tone with the SHIFT switches, you can really shape your driven sound in almost all possible ways. Add the final 5 band graphic EQ and the tonal possibilities are really endless. But be careful, this is not a ‘set and forget’ amp. Being it extremely versatile it can of course be set to a tone that could be totally far from what is needed on that part. It needs a degree of experimentation and experience before you can really master it! Controls: • LEAD DRIVE: sets the amount of gain of the lead stage. Increase this to have more sustaining distortion and decrease it to get a more edgy and crunchy type of distortion. • VOLUME: sets the gain of the initial stage. This is the gain that comes before all others in the amp signal path. • MASTER: sets the power amp level. This is the latest level in the amp signal path. Setting high gains in the 243 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop • • • • • • • • • • • 244 Gear Models preamp (Volume and Lead Drive) and also setting Master to a very high level can result in an overly pushed sound that could be difficult to obtain a good sound. Keep this at high levels only if Volume and Lead drive are not so high. TREBLE: sets the amount of high frequencies on the sound. BASS: sets the amount of low frequencies on the sound. MIDDLE: sets the amount of mid frequencies on the sound BRIGHT: boosts brilliance of the preamp, especially when the Volume control is kept low. SHIFT (BASS): modifies the frequencies where the Bass control works. SHIFT (TREBLE): modifies the frequencies where the Treble control works. RHYTHM 2: when enabled the preamp has even more gain, and slightly changes its tonal character. DEEP: when enabled the bass response of the amplifier is extended. EQ: enables the graphic EQ. PRESENCE: when turned up the amp becomes more present and brighter. REVERB: controls the amount of reverb coming from the internal spring unit. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Brit 8000 Based on Marshall® JCM800™ head The amp that, although most think of the Plexi’s as the defining tone of a pushed Marshall, in reality it’s the JCM800 that people are hearing. The JCM800 was the first departure from the Plexi format designed for players who desired a “hotter” front end and more control over the overall output volume. The result? More preamp overdrive and crunch at controllable volumes. Controls: • • • • • • • 245 SENSITIVITY: switches between High or Low input gain PRESENCE: boosts high frequencies from 0 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. MASTER VOLUME: adjusts the final output level of the power amp stage from 0 to 10. PRE AMP VOLUME: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage from 0 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Brit 9000 Based on Marshall® JCM900™ head The Brit 9000 is based upon the early 90s introduction of the “evolution” of the JCM800, the JCM900. This dual channel, dual reverb head was designed for versatility with channel 1 voiced from clean to low level lead gain when cranked, and channel 2 voiced with enough gain to provide fearsome lead tones at low gain to screaming solo tones at high gain. Controls: • • • • • • • • • • 246 PRESENCE: boosts high frequencies from 0 to 10. PRESENCE: boosts high frequencies from 0 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. MASTER VOLUME: adjusts the final output level of the power amp stage from 0 to 10. GAIN SENSITIVITY: boosts the input gain of the main preamp stage from 0 to 10. PRE AMP VOLUME: adjusts the input gain of the main preamp stage from 0 to 10. POWER LEVEL: switches between High and Low power level. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Brit Silver Based on Marshall® Jubilee™ head Based on the 1987 Marshall Silver Jubilee commemorating the 25th anniversary of the Marshall company, the Brit Silver features the 3-gain mode of the preamp circuit “clean”, Rhythm Clip and Lead. The Silver Jubilee was also the first Marshall to feature an output power section that could be switched from full to 1/2 power, thus providing that JCM800 tone at reasonable volumes. The Brit Silver faithfully recreates the original Silver Jubilee down to every minute detail for hyper-real authentic Marshall tone. Controls: • • • • • • • • • 247 PRESENCE: boosts high frequencies from 0 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. OUTPUT MASTER: adjusts the final output level of the power amp stage from 0 to 10. PULL CHANNEL: switches between Clean channel and Lead channel LEAD MASTER: adjusts the final output level of the lead channel from 0 to 10. INPUT GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the main preamp stage from 0 to 10. PULL RHYTHM CLIP: adds more gain to the preamp stage. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models British Tube Lead 1 Based on Marshall® JCM800™ head Made popular by the hard rockers of the ‘80s this British guitar amp has remained a prized tone for many of today’s guitar players. Able to crank out great tube saturated tone with ease, this model is a go to amp for a variety of heavy rock guitar sounds. Controls: • • • • • • • 248 GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 1 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. PRESENCE: boost the high frequencies of the EQ stage, from 1 to 10. SPRING REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound, from 1 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage, from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models British Tube Lead 2 Based on Marshall® JCM900™ head The younger sibling to the British Tube Lead 1, this model is capable of great rock tone, leads, and heavy crunch. While grittier and a little more aggressive, it still has the classic tone that has made this family of amps a household name in rock guitar. Controls: • • • • • • • 249 GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 1 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. PRESENCE: boost the high frequencies of the EQ stage, from 1 to 10. SPRING REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound, from 1 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage, from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Custom Modern Hi-Gain Based on the classic AmpliTube model, this amp features lots of gain for that over the edge distortion sound. Similar to modern tube lead sound in character, Modern Hi-Gain provides an additional take on that type of sound. Controls: • • • • • • • 250 GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 1 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. PRESENCE: boost the high frequencies of the EQ stage, from 1 to 10. SPRING REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound, from 1 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage, from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Custom Solid State Fuzz Based on AmpliTube 1’s fuzz amp, this model is a very distinct and distorted sound, reminiscent of ‘60s fuzz sounds. Controls: • • • • • • 251 GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 1 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. PRESENCE: boost the high frequencies of the EQ stage, from 1 to 10. SPRING REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound, from 1 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage, from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Custom Solid State Lead This model features a precise solid state lead sound. It has a darker tone and excels at high gain lead tones. It is very suitable for hard rock leads and its gain is very stable, making it easy to use at low volume levels. Controls: • • • • • • 252 GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 1 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. PRESENCE: boost the high frequencies of the EQ stage, from 1 to 10. SPRING REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound, from 1 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage, from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models German 34 Based on Bogner® Ecstasy XTC 3534 Its German creator really put the boutique sound into this amplifier that has everything you need to sculpt the tone of your dreams to its finest with its EL34-fueled sound. From crystalline cleans to edgy and raging distortions. It features three channels: the clean green, the famous blue channel overdrive and the red channel for high gain tones. Controls: • VOL. 1: adjusts the volume for channel 1. • GAIN 1: adjusts the input gain for channel 1. • VOL. / GAIN: these are the same controls of the previous, but for both channel 1 and channel 2 depending on which one is selected. • TREBLE/MIDDLE/BASS: EQ section available for the three channels. The EQ is designed to be always in the middle of the two leds of each channel, so you won’t tweak the wrong EQ section. • CH. SELECT lets you navigate among the three channels. • BOOST: engages a boost for all channels. • N/B1/B2 SWITCH: this switch lets you choose between 3 bright modes. N stands for normal and provides the most natural sound. B1 is brighter and B2 is even brighter than B1. • PRESENCE: controls the brightness of the power-amp for all the channels. 253 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models MiniPlex 20 Based on Friedman® Pink Taco PT-20 Super versatile and powered by EL84, this American model provides great tones from blues to heavy metal with just a few knob tweaks. This model loves to take pedals from Overdrives to Modulation effects and reacts exceedingly well to the player’s performance with its harmonically rich and resonating tone. Controls: • BASS: This adds or takes away bass or bottom end. As the amp gets louder you may want to back this off a bit. • MIDDLE: Adds or takes away midrange. Start at 5 or 6, lower settings will scoop the mids, higher levels will allow your audience to actually hear the guitar in the mix. • TREBLE: This adds or takes away treble. Start at 5 and adjust to taste. • MASTER: This is the MiniPlex 20’s MASTER VOLUME. The more you turn it up the louder it gets. • GAIN: This adds gain/distortion. Adjust to taste. Don’t be afraid. • S: Gain structure switch provides three choices of overall gain of the MiniPlex 20. 254 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Metal Lead T Based on MESA/Boogie® Triple Rectifier® (Lead Channel) This classic amp provides the tightest bass and fastest response, even at extreme speeds and gain. The result is perfect for speed, thrash, and other aggressive metal styles as well as smoother, cleaner styles, and it is a must for all modern metal. Controls: • • • • • • • • 255 GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 1 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. PRESENCE: boost the high frequencies of the EQ stage, from 1 to 10. SPRING REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound, from 1 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage, from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Metal Lead V Based on Peavey® 5150® 100W head Engineered to the exacting demands of some of the greatest guitarists of all time, this amp quickly became a favorite of tone purists and gain heads alike. Capable of some of the cleanest – or the heaviest – tones of all time. Controls: • • • • • • • 256 GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 1 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. BOTTOM: use this knob to enhance the speaker bottom end resonance. SPRING REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound, from 1 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage, from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Metal Lead W Based on Randall® Warhead™ Designed by some of the hardest rockers of the ‘90s, this amp was built for pure metal mayhem. There may be no heavier, more aggressive amp in the world. Controls: PRE MODEL: • GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 1 to 10. EQ MODEL: • • • • • BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. BOTTOM: use this knob to enhance the speaker bottom end resonance. SPRING REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound, from 1 to 10. AMP MODEL: • VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage, from 1 to 10. 257 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Modern Tube Lead Based on Mesa-Boogie® Dual Rectifier® This amp is a model of one of the leaders in hard, driven rock tones made today. Capable of searing leads and heavy crunch, this amp has been rectified to create a modern rock tone that is hard to beat. Controls: • • • • • • • 258 GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 1 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. PRESENCE: boost the high frequencies of the EQ stage, from 1 to 10. SPRING REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound, from 1 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage, from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Red Pig Based on Marshall® Major™ head This gem from the 60s is based on the Marshall Major 200 “Pig” (as it was nicknamed) made famous by players like Ritchie Blackmore, Jimmy Page, Joe Perry and at times Stevie Ray Vaughan. It was originally produced for players who needed more stage volume and sported a full 200 watts powered by KT88 power tubes. Nicknamed “the Pig” because it was a full 3” deeper than Marshalls of the day to accommodate the larger transformers, it quickly became the favorite of larger venue players. Controls: • • • • • • • • 259 PRESENCE: boosts high frequencies from 0 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. VOLUME 1: adjusts the input gain of the “bright” channel 1 from 0 to 10. VOLUME 1: adjusts the input gain of the “normal” channel 2 from 0 to 10. 1-2 SWITCH: switches between channel 1 and channel 2. BRIDGE: enables channel bridging. Use the Bridge option to add more drive. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models SilverPlate 50 Based on PRS® Archon 50 If you are looking for a modern and aggressive, but still versatile sound with the response of a classic amplifier, this American model is the perfect match for your needs. It’s able to deliver both clear, sparkling cleans and aggressive overdriven bite. Controls: • PRESENCE/DEPTH: The Presence and Depth controls are global and affect both channels. Presence affects the upper high-end, and Depth affects the ultra-low frequencies. • CHANNEL CONTROLS: Each channel is equipped with a Volume, Treble, Middle, Bass, and Master control. Use the Volume control to adjust the level of preamp gain. Use the Master control to adjust the overall channel volume. Adjust the tone controls to taste. • BRIGHT SWITCHES: These switches allow you to set the overall brightness of each channel. • LEAD/CLEAN SELECTOR: A switch to select which channel is active. 260 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models SLD 100 Based on Soldano® SLO-100™ Head Model The SLD 100 is true icon of high-gain tube distortion tone. The design has remained constant for over 20 years, and it is a hallmark of quality and design. It is often regarded as the finest guitar amp in the world. With the SLD 100 you have separate preamp and master volume controls along with three bands of equalization and a presence control. The SLD 100 uses the finest military grade components and custom designed transformers to put the industry’s finest high-gain guitar tone right in your hands. Controls: • BRIGHT-NORMAL: the Bright Switch offers sparkling highs to the Normal channel adding to its versatility. • CRUNCH-CLEAN: when set to clean, the gain is cut, providing full, clean, undistorted warmth, which is incredibly responsive and alive. When switched to crunch, the Normal channel responds with higher gain and a tough, metal edged crunch. • NORMAL PREAMP: adjusts the input gain of the Normal channel preamp stage from 1 to 11. • OVERDRIVE PREAMP: adjusts the input gain of the Overdrive channel preamp stage from 1 to 11. • BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 11. • MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 11. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 11. • NORMAL MASTER: adjusts the final output level of the Normal channel to the power amp stage from 1 to 11. • OVERDRIVE MASTER: adjusts the final output level of the Overdrive channel to the power amp stage from 1 to 11. • PRESENCE: boosts high frequencies for both preamp channels from 1 to 11. • OVERDRIVE-NORMAL: switches between the overdrive and normal channels. 261 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models VHandcraft 4 Based on Diezel VH4 Still made as in 1992, this is the first iconic amp of a famous German manufacturer that influenced a lot of modern music’s heavy tones with its meaty sound. The result is articulate and thick. A must have for heavy players. Channel Voicing: • PRESENCE/DEPTH: The Presence and Depth controls are global and affect both channels. Presence affects the upper high-end, and Depth affects the ultra-low frequencies. • CHANNEL 1 (Clean): This channel was designed for clean, undistorted sound with high power and good harmonics. With its gain control to the upper third, it sounds soft and warm. Gain at lower settings produce more percussive and penetrating clean sounds. Full gain setting makes crunch sounds possible. • CHANNEL 2 (Crunch): Channel 2 is a blues guitarist’s closest friend. Its dynamic spectrum is especially beautiful in the lower frequency range. Its gain range goes from clean to distorted. Due to its different voicing the 2nd channel will sound a little softer than channel one in clean. “Raw” probably best describes this channel. • CHANNEL 3 (Distortion): Its concept is heavy rhythm guitar. The distortion is noticeably tighter than in channel 2. The gain structure of channel 3 is designed to deliver great distorted sound even with guitars that have relatively low output, like many vintage guitars. • CHANNEL 4 (Ultra High-Gain): The Solo channel. A little more mid heavy than channel 3, therefore it punches through the band sound quite well. See channel 3 description for gain control setting. Often a gain setting near one o’clock is sufficient for absolute high gain distortion. Use the volume control here and for all other channels to match the individual channel volumes. 262 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Controls: GAIN: controls the gain in the preamplifier section to get distortion and saturation. CHANNEL VOLUME: controls the volume of the selected channel. TREBLE: controls the amount of high frequencies in the selected channel. MIDDLE: controls the amount of mid frequencies in the selected channel. BASS: controls the amount of bass frequencies in the selected channel. DEEP: this is an active bass control for the power amp that adds low end punch to the power amp centered at 80Hz. It does not alter the dynamic behavior of the power amp. • PRESENCE: this knob controls the treble part of the power amps tone spectrum. Its frequency centers at about 4kHz. Treble is produced and dispersed in a very small beam from the speaker, so be sure to position yourself in the projection area of the speaker when making adjustments. • MASTER VOLUME: controls the final volume of the Power amplifier(s). The layout of the controls is such that full volume is achieved at the one o’clock knob setting. Turning the knob further will overdrive the power amp(s) to create power amp distortion for those of you that prefer this sort of thing. We added this feature to round out the distortion sound palette on the extreme end. So, you friends of all things vintage can get colorations and distortion textures that only power amp tubes can deliver. Bring your ear plugs, please. • • • • • • 263 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Vintage Metal Lead Based on Marshall® JMP100™ head This amp is based on an all-time classic, from its origin in the ‘70s through Aussie hard rock crazy ‘80s metal and beyond. Few amps have rocked as hard, for as long. Controls: • • • • • • • 264 GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 1 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. PRESENCE: boost the high frequencies of the EQ stage, from 1 to 10. SPRING REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound, from 1 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage, from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube Bass 360Bass Preamp Based on Acoustic® 360™ Bass Preamp This amp toured and recorded for years with one of the biggest and bold rock bands ever. Classic rock tones are a natural with this amp, but it is also known for being used by one of the most famous jazz bassists of all time. Show no quarter and make your bass kill with this amp-solid state but loud and proud. When paired with its Matching cabined (1x18” Horn Bass) it can sound really dark when compared to today’s bass amps, but that’s the magic of it! Controls: • BRIGHT: boosts brilliance of the preamp, especially when the Volume control is kept low. • VOLUME: sets the overall volume of the amp. Set it low for pure and clean tones and push it for driven sounds. • TREBLE: sets the amount of mid and high frequencies on the sound. • BASS: sets the amount of low frequencies on the sound. • RANGE: forms a semi-parametric midrange equalizer together with Effect. Use the Range control to select the center frequency of the mid frequency equalization process among 5 positions. • EFFECT: forms a semi-parametric midrange equalizer together with Range. Use Effect boost or cut the midrange frequencies selected with the Range control. • FUZZ: turns On the built-in Fuzz effect. 265 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • GAIN: sets the output volume of the Fuzz effect. • ATTACK: sets the type of Fuzz effect that is applied. When set to Min the sound is similar to a smooth overdrive, when moved toward max the sound gets more aggressive and fuzzy. 266 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Green BA250 Based on Trace Elliot® AH250™ Head This is a model of a solid state powerhouse bass amplifier with great tone-shaping controls, a warm sound unlike most solid state amps, and a sought-after preamp. Despite being solid state this amp delivers an incredibly warm and tasteful tone. With its signature “Middle cut pre shaping” feature will immediately bring you back to ‘80s bass lines! Controls • GRAPHIC EQUALIZATION: turns On the graphic EQ when enabled. • MIDDLE CUT PRE-SHAPING: engages a mid frequency shaping that’s very characteristic of this amp. When it is Off, the preamp is almost flat and natural sounding. • GAIN: sets the preamp input gain. Follow what the fancy input level LED meter tells… and you can’t go wrong! Unless you want overdrive it! • GRAPHIC EQUALIZATION: 11 sliders to create your tone. Only a few graphic EQ have the musical quality of this powerful sculpting tool. • BALANCE: it balances the levels when you engage or disable the Graphic EQ. • LEVEL: overall amp volume. It sets the level that is sent to the power amp stage. 267 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models New York B750 Based on Aguilar® DB750 This American bass amplifier model is the perfect combination of tubes and MOSFET technology with its all-tube preamp and discrete MOSFET output section. It takes any bass to its finest with its raw power and excellent tone, and with its wide frequency response, it’s perfect to be paired with low-tuned or five or six-string basses. Controls • GAIN: This pot controls the gain of the preamp section. Clean sounds are usually achieved by setting the input gain around 11 or 12 o’clock. A little bit of musical distortion will occur if set past one or two o’clock. • BRIGHT: This switch is passive RC pre-emphasis circuit at 5-7 kHz. The bright switch will add a brighter timbre to the entire range of your bass. • TREBLE: Tube driven shelving type, boosts up to 12 db. The center frequency is set at 4 kHz. • MID: Tube driven shelving centered at 400 Hz. • BASS: Tube driven shelving type, boosts up to 12 db. The center frequency is set at 40 Hz. • DEEP: The deep switch adds 3db of broadband boost at 30 Hz. • MASTER: This pot controls the output level to your power amp. 268 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Solid State Bass Preamp This model features a solid-state bass preamp, EQ, and a solid-state power amp module. It cleans up beautifully and drives just as hard. Controls: • • • • • • • 269 GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 1 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. PRESENCE: boosts the high frequencies of the EQ stage, from 1 to 10. SPRING REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound, from 1 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage, from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube SVX SVX-500 Based on Ampeg® BA500® Model The SVX-500 is a high quality solid-state bass amp, with a sonic fingerprint that will deliver a big and detailed sound in any musical situation. Thanks to its powerful preamp sound shaping controls, this amp model will be great on all musical genres and styles. Its natural cabinet match is the SVX-500 cabinet, but you can get interesting sounds experimenting with all the included cabs options. Controls: MUTE: is linked with the Amp Module “Peak/Mute” light. Essentially, it mutes the signal at the Amp input. PAD: reduces the gain of the preamp by 15dB. PEAK/MUTE LED: this LED turns on when the Mute button is pressed or the preamp is overloaded. GAIN: controls the gain of the BA-500 preamp from 1 to 10. BASS: boost and cuts the low frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. ULTRA MID: boost and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boost and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. MASTER: controls the volume of the DSP power amp stage from 1 to 10. LIMIT: enables the limiter in the power amp and is linked with the right side yellow light. This limiter acts only when the master level is very high and the power amp is pushed at its limit. • EQ ON: turns on the graphic EQ when pressed. • • • • • • • • • 270 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop • • • • 271 Gear Models EQ ON LED: turns on when the graphic EQ is enabled. GRAPHIC EQ SLIDERS: sets the gain for each graphic EQ band from -10 to +10 dB. POWER SWITCH: turns On or Off the amplifier and it is linked to the Bypass button in the Amp module. POWER LED: turns on when the Power switch is on “1”. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models SVX-15R Based on Ampeg® B15R Portaflex “Flip Top”® Model This is the 1960’s classic bass amplifier, enhanced and improved for the actual musical scenario. This alltube model limited production features the Ampeg® “classic” tube preamp combined with a selectable tube 60W/100W power amplifier. This option gives you the most sought-after vintage bass sound ever. In addition, if you want to get that unmistakable 60s tone; match it with the SVX-15R cabinet. Controls: • • • • • • • • • • • 272 ULTRA HI/LO: these two switches control the timbre shaping of the B-15R preamp. GAIN: controls the gain of the B-15R preamp from 1 to 10. BASS: boost and cuts the low frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. MID: boost and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. FREQUENCY: selects a frequency band from 1 to 5 positions. Intervention center-frequencies are: 200, 400, 900, 1.5k or 2.5kHz. TREBLE: boost and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. MASTER: controls the volume of the power amp stage. 60W / 100W SWITCH: sets the power of the power amp stage. The virtual tubes visually represent the master value. POWER SWITCH: turns On or Off the amplifier and it is linked to the Amp Module Mute button. When ON the mute is Off, and the Amp emits sound. When Power is in the lower position the amp is MUTED and the Mute switch lights up (on the top frame). STANDBY: is linked to the Amp Module Bypass button on the top frame. When bypassed the Amp section is not affecting the sound. ON/OFF: sets the mode of the Amp. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models SVX-CL Based on Ampeg® SVT CLASSIC® Model This is the authentic and classic Ampeg® tube sound. This all-tube bass head delivers a warm, harmonically rich and punchy sound that is a trademark for the rock bass sound, both live and in the studio. The SVX-CL is the amp that created the rock bass sound. Its natural speaker match is the SVX-810E or the SVX-410H. Controls: GAIN: controls the gain of the SVT head preamp from 0.0 to 10.0. ULTRA HI/LO: these two switches control the timbre shaping of the SVT Classic preamp. BASS: boost and cuts the low frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. MIDRANGE: boost and cuts middle frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. FREQUENCY: selects the center frequency for the Midrange control from 1 to 5 positions. The numbers correspond to the following center frequencies as indicated: ∙ 1=220Hz ∙ 2=450Hz ∙ 3=800Hz ∙ 4=1.6kHz ∙ 5=3kHz • TREBLE: boost and cuts high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. • MASTER: controls the volume of the DSP power amp stage from 0 to 10. • STANDBY/POWER: is linked to the Amp Module Bypass button on the top frame. When bypassed the Amp section is not affecting the sound. • • • • • • 273 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • POWER SWITCH: turns On or Off the amplifier and it is linked to the Amp Module Mute button. When it’s on “1” the mute is Off, and the Amp emits sound. 274 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models SVX-PRO Based on Ampeg® SVT-4 PRO® Model This is a real all-round high end bass amplifier. It combines a fully featured tube preamp that can really cover any sound need with a tight solid state power amplifier. The SVX-PRO sound spectrum is wide and rich. You can get from extremely neutral and transparent sounds to powerful unique tones. Experiment with the SVX-PRO settings and create your own custom sounds. Controls: • • • • • • • • • 275 MUTE: cuts the signal at the Amp input and it is linked with the Amp Module “Mute” button. -15dB: reduces the gain of the preamp. GAIN: controls the gain of the STV-4 preamp from 1 to 10. PEAK LED: when the preamp is nearing its clipping level this led turns on. COMPRESSION: sets the SVT preamp internal compressor’s compression level from 0 to 10. At 0 there will be no compression at all. ULTRA HI/LO: these two switches control the timbre shaping of the SVT-4 preamp. BASS: boost and cuts the low frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. MIDRANGE: boost and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. FREQUENCY: selects the center frequency for the Midrange control from 1 to 5 positions. The numbers correspond to the following center frequencies as indicated: ∙ 1=220Hz Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop • • • • • • • • • • 276 Gear Models ∙ 2=450Hz ∙ 3=800Hz ∙ 4=1.6kHz ∙ 5=3kHz TREBLE: boost and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. LIMIT DEFEAT: disables the limiter of the Power amp section. LIMIT LED: turns on when the power amp Limiter starts limiting. BRIGHT: when enabled adds a more lively top end response to the input signal. MASTER: controls the volume of the power amp stage. GRAPHIC EQ SLIDERS: sets the gain for each graphic EQ band from -12 to +12dB. GRAPHIC EQ LEVEL SLIDER: sets the gain for the graphic EQ stage from -12 to +12dB. POWER LED: turns on when the power switch is in its upper position, and the Amp is ON. ACTIVE LED: (in the graphic EQ section). Normally, this LED is on. Clicking on it will disable/enable the Graphic EQ section and turns Off/On the LED. POWER SWITCH: linked to the Amp module Bypass button. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models SVX-VR Based on Ampeg® SVT-VR® Model The SVX-VR is a vintage reissue of an early 1970’s “Blue-Line” SVT head. The preamp stage, power section, and even rocker switches emulate the exact signal path, tone, and vibe of the original rock ’n’ roll workhorse. This is the exact recreation of the 70’s best rock bass amp ever. Global Controls: • CH1 / COMBINE / CH2: Selects Channel 1, Combine mode or Channel 2. Combine mode emulates the bridged input configuration. In this mode the controls of both channels affect the sound. • NORMAL / BRIGHT: This switch, when engaged (right side down), enables the bright mode. Bright mode enhances the high frequencies of the input signal. • POWER SWITCH: turns On or Off the amplifier and it is linked to the Amp Module Mute button. When ON the mute is Off, and the Amp emits sound. When Power is in the lower position the amp is MUTED and the Mute switch lights up (on the top frame). Controls for Channel I: • ULTRA-HI: this switch, when engaged (right side down), enhances the amount of high frequency output. The amount of boost is dependent on the setting of the volume control. • 1•2•3: this switch selects the frequency that will be affected by the midrange knob. The available frequencies are 220 Hz (left side of the switch engaged), 800 Hz (switch in the center position), or 3 kHz (right side of the switch engaged). • BASS-CUT/OFF/ULTRA-LO: engaging the left side of this switch decreases the low frequency output. Engaging the right side of this switch enhances the low frequency output. The switch is inactive in the center position. 277 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • VOLUME: use this control to adjust the level of the power amp stage. • TREBLE: use this to adjust the high frequency level. This provides up to 12 dB of boost, or 12 dB of cut at 4 kHz. The high frequency output is flat at the center position. • MIDRANGE: use this to adjust the midrange frequency level. This provides up to 20 dB of boost, or 20 dB of cut at the selected frequency. The midrange frequency output is flat at the center position. Rotate the control counter-clockwise for a “contoured” sound (more distant, less midrange output) or clockwise for a sound which really cuts through. • BASS: use this to adjust the low frequency level. This provides up to 12 dB of boost, or 12 dB of cut at 40 Hz. The low frequency output is flat at the center position. Controls for Channel II: • ULTRA-HI: this switch, when engaged (right side down), enhances the amount of high frequency output. The amount of boost is dependent on the setting of the volume control. • ULTRA-LO: this switch, when engaged (right side down), enhances the low frequency output. • VOLUME: use this control to adjust the level of the power amp stage. • TREBLE: use this to adjust the high frequency level. This provides up to 12 dB of boost, or 12 dB of cut at 4 kHz. The high frequency output is flat at the center position. • BASS: use this to adjust the low frequency level. This provides up to 12 dB of boost, or 12 dB of cut at 40 Hz. The low frequency output is flat at the center position. 278 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models SVX-4B Officially Certified Ampeg® V-4B® Model The SVX-4B is an all-tube 100W legend, reissue of the legendary 1971 original, delivering the pure tube vintage sound and unmistakable grind that earned this classic a place in bass history. Controls: • ULTRA LO: this switch, when engaged (right side down), enhances the amount of low frequency output by 2 dB at 40 Hz and -11 dB cut at 500 Hz. • 1•2•3 SWITCH: this switch selects the frequency that will be affected by the midrange control. The available frequencies are: ∙ Left = 220 Hz ∙ Center = 800 Hz ∙ Right = 3 kHz • ULTRA HI: this switch, when engaged (right side down), enhances the amount of high frequency output by 7 dB at 8 kHz. • GAIN: this control adjusts the basic level of signal in the preamp. • BASS: use this to adjust the low frequency level of the amplifier. This provides up to 13 dB of boost, or 12 dB of cut at 40 Hz. The low frequency output is flat at the center position. • MIDRANGE: use this to adjust the midrange frequency level of the amplifier. This provides up to 11 dB of boost, or 21 dB of cut at the selected frequency. The midrange frequency output is flat at the center position. Rotate the control counter-clockwise for a “contoured” sound (more distant, less midrange output) or clockwise for a sound which really cuts through. • TREBLE: use this to adjust the high frequency level of the amplifier. This provides up to 14 dB of boost, or 17 dB of cut at 4 kHz. The high frequency output is flat at the center position. • MASTER: controls the volume of the power amp stage. 279 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • POWER SWITCH: turns On or Off the amplifier and it is linked to the Amp Module Mute button. When ON the mute is Off, and the Amp emits sound. When Power is in the lower position the amp is MUTED and the Mute switch lights up (on the top frame). 280 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models SVX-15N Based on Ampeg® HERITAGE B-15N® Model The SVX-15N features distinct 1964 and 1966 channels, plus flexible Baxandall EQ and selectable bias modes for ultimate tone control. Built to exacting standards, it meticulously recreates the world’s most recorded bass tone. Global Controls: • 1964 CH / 1966 CH: Toggles between the 1964 and 1966 channels. • 1964 BIAS / 1966 BIAS: Toggles between 1964 cathode bias or 1966 fixed bias. • ON / OFF: turns On or Off the amplifier and it is linked to the Amp Module Mute button. When ON the mute is Off, and the Amp emits sound. When Power is in the lower position the amp is MUTED and the Mute switch lights up (on the top frame). Controls for 1964 Channel • VOLUME: Use this control to adjust the level of the power amp stage. • TREBLE: Use this to adjust the high frequency level of the amplifier. This provides up to 18 dB of boost or cut at 5 kHz. The high frequency output is flattest at the center position. • BASS: Use this to adjust the low frequency level of the amplifier. This provides up to 10 dB of boost or cut at 40 Hz. The low frequency output is flattest at the center position. 281 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Controls for 1966 Channel • VOLUME: Use this control to adjust the level of the power amp stage. • TREBLE: Use this to adjust the high frequency level of the amplifier. This provides up to 18 dB of boost, or –30 dB of cut at 5 kHz. The high frequency output is flattest at the center position. • BASS: Use this to adjust the low frequency level of the amplifier. This provides up to 11 dB of boost or cut at 40 Hz. The low frequency output is flattest at the center position. 282 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube TONEX Overview AmpliTube TONEX is the piece of gear that lets you load your local Tone Models inside AmpliTube 5. You can find AmpliTube TONEX in the Gear Selector under the “Other” category. You can place AmpliTube TONEX in any amp slot. 283 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models When AmpliTube TONEX is loaded, a top bar is available which shows the active Tone Model. 284 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop By clicking the drop down arrow computer. Gear Models , the Amp View is filled with a list of all the Tone Models available in your Select any Tone Model from this list to load it inside TONEX. Press the 285 to close the Tone Models list and return to the Amp View. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models You can filter the Tone Models’ list by using the filter button. Press the 286 to close the filter menu and return to the Tone Model list. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Press the knob icon Press the 287 Gear Models to show and edit the TONEX chain. icon to close the TONEX chain. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube TONEX Parameters Advanced Parameters When the ADVANCED PARAMETERS button is pressed a new layer is shown under the CHAIN BAR showing the available ADVANCED PARAMETERS. If the TONE EQ is set to PRE (POST disabled), it’s placed after the NOISE GATE module. If the TONE EQ is set to POST, it’s placed before the REVERB module. • • • • • • • • • • • • POST: sets the TONE EQ to be PRE (after NOISE GATE) or POST (before REVERB). BASS: adjusts the bass frequencies shelf EQ gain from 0 to 10. BASS FREQ: selects the bass frequency from 75 Hz to 600 Hz. MID: adjusts the mid frequencies peak EQ gain from 0 to 10. MID FREQ: selects the mid frequency from 150 Hz to 5 kHz. MID Q: sets the q of the mid frequencies from 0.2 to 3.0. TREBLE: adjusts the high frequencies shelf EQ gain from 0 to 10. TREBLE FREQ: selects the high frequency from 1 kHz to 4 kHz. PRESENCE: adjusts the presence of the amplifier from 0 to 10. DEPTH: adjusts the depth of the amplifier from 0 to 10. MIX: blends the Tone Model signal so that it can be used as parallel processing from 0% to 100%. RESET CHAIN: resets all parameters of the chain (not only the ADVANCED PARAMETERS) to their default values. Depending on the Tone Model GUI the bolded parameters can also be edited directly in the Amp View. In addition to these there are other two parameters available only in the Amp View: • GAIN: sets the input gain of the Tone Model from 0 to 10 resulting in more/less saturation. • VOLUME: adjusts the master volume of the preset with all its modules from 0 to 10. 288 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Noise Gate When the NOISE GATE button is pressed a new layer is shown under the CHAIN BAR showing the available NOISE GATE parameters. By pressing the NOISE GATE icon • • • • the NOISE GATE can be turned ON or OFF. ON/OFF: activates or deactivates the Noise Gate. THRESHOLD: adjusts the threshold of the gate to filter out noise, from -100 dB to 0 dB. RELEASE: adjust the release time of the gate from 20 ms to 500 ms. DEPTH: adjust the amount of noise reduction of the gate from -20 dB to -100 dB. Depending on the Tone Model GUI the THRESHOLD parameter can also be edited directly from the Amp View which is found under the NOISE G. label. 289 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Compressor When the COMPRESSOR button is pressed a new layer is shown under the CHAIN BAR showing the available COMPRESSOR parameters. By pressing the COMPRESSOR icon the COMPRESSOR can be turned ON or OFF. If the COMPRESSOR is set to PRE (POST disabled) it’s placed before the Tone Model module. If the COMPRESSOR is set to POST, it’s placed after the Tone Model module. • • • • • ON/OFF: activates or deactivates the Compressor. POST: sets the compressor to be PRE or POST the Tone Model Module THRESHOLD: adjusts the threshold at which the compressor starts to operate from o dB to -40 dB. GAIN: adjusts the COMPRESSOR output volume from -30 dB to 0 dB. ATTACK: adjusts the compresso attack time from 1 ms to 51 ms. Depending on the Tone Model GUI the THRESHOLD parameter can also be edited directly from the Amp View where is found under the COMP label. 290 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Tone Model When a Tone Model is selected in the top bar, the TONEX Chain shows the name of the Amp and Cab that are part of that Tone Model. When a TONEX instance is loaded in AmpliTube the CAB part of its branch is automatically bypassed to a void a “double cabinet”. If you want, you can still turn it on any time. 291 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Reverb When the REVERB button is pressed a new layer is shown under the CHAIN BAR showing the available REVERB parameters. By pressing the REVERB icon • • • • • • the REVERB can be turned ON or OFF. ON/OFF: activates or deactivates the Reverb. TYPE: sets the type of reverb between SPRING 1, SPRING 2, SPRING 3, ROOM and PLATE. TIME: sets the length of the reverb tail from 0 to 10. PRE DELAY: sets the pre-delay time before the reverb starts. COLOR: sets the reverb tone from -10 (darker) to +10 (brighter). MIX: sets the mix amount of the reverb from 0% to 100%. Depending on the Tone Model GUI, the MIX parameter can also be edited directly from the Amp view which is found under the REVERB label. 292 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Brian May BM 30 Based on Brian May’s VOX® AC30™ Based on the classic triple VOX® AC30™ setup, this model offers 3 amps to match Brian May’s iconic setup. 293 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models BM DK Based on the custom “Deacy” Amp with variable battery power The Deacy amp, built in the ‘70s by Queen’s bassist, John Deacon, is a small amp that has a long and surprising story that led to this one-of-a-kind sound. Brian combines the Deacy’s peculiarities with creativity to get many of his sounds from the Queen era including sounds resembling woodwinds and brass sounds. This setup represents the Brian characteristic stereo sound, here’s an example of his typical rig: Red Special -> Treble Booster -> Deacy This amp has no control whatsoever, but we’ve added the Battery level to simulate the slight change in tone that occurs when the battery gets older, a sound that Brian favors at times. 294 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Carvin® V3M Officially Certified Carvin® V3M™ Head Model The 50 watt V3M amp is the musician’s dream, delivering awesome power with incredible tone including lush reverb. The V3M is one of the most versatile amplifier. It offers “Pristine Clean” for shimmering highs and deep bass. Switch the channel to classic rock with the deepest metal crunch or continuous sustain. Or, switch to another channel for rich harmonics infused from the “Soak” control for rich Jazz or country blues. Each channel incorporates its own character drive switches - “Bright to Soak” and “Thick” to “Intense” with EQ switches expanding the tone. Global Controls: • • • • MASTER VOLUME: adjusts the overall output level, from 0 to 10. MASTER REVERB: controls the amount of reverb coming from the internal spring unit, from 0 to 10. CH. : channel selector. BACK: visualizes the Rear Panel. Controls for each of the 3 channels: • DRIVE: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 0 to 10. • VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage, from 0 to 10. 295 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop • • • • • • • Gear Models PRESENCE: boost the high frequencies of the EQ stage, from 0 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. EQX: expands the tone adding mid range frequencies. INTENSE / THICK: (Channel 1 - 2) selects three different drive modes, from Thick to Intense. BRIGHT / SOAK: (Channel 3) selects three different frequency responses, from Soak to Bright. Controls for Rear Panel: • • • • • • 296 POWER MODE: switches the power amp output between 50, 22 and 7 watts. BOOST SWITCH: enables the power amp stage boost. BOOST LEVEL: adjusts the power amp boost amount from 0 to 6 dB. LED ON: turns on the leds behind the grille. LED RED/BLUE: selects the leds color, Red or Blue. FRONT: visualizes the front main panel. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Dimebag Darrell CFH Collection Darrell 100 Based on Randall® RG 100 ES™ The iconic 120W solid state amp used by Dimebag Darrell to record the legendary album “Cowboys From Hell”. Controls: • • • • • • • • • 297 REVERB: controls the amount of reverb coming from the internal spring unit from 0 to 10. PRESENCE: boosts high frequencies above the treble control from 0 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the treble frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. PULL: Activates clipping diodes to add compression and increases sustain for channel 2 (distortion channel). MASTER: adjusts the overall output level of the power amp stage for the currently selected channel, from 0 to 10. GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage for the currently selected channel, from 0 to 10. CHANNEL: switches between channel 1 (clean channel) and channel 2 (distortion channel). Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Jazz Amp 120 CFH Based on Roland® JC-120™ This versatile clean amp, with its built-in analog chorus and vibrato unit, was used for the recording of clean parts on the “Cowboys From Hell” album. Controls: • BRIGHT: boosts the brilliance of the preamp, especially when the Volume control is kept low. • VOLUME: sets the overall amp volume from 0 to 10. The amp remains clean up to volume 3 or 4 and starts distorting at higher settings. • DISTORTION: turning this knob up from the minimum position activates the distortion circuit. Higher settings add increasing amounts of distortion. • REVERB: controls the amount of reverb from 0 to 10. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the sound from 0 to 10. • MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the middle frequencies of the sound from 0 to 10. • BASS: boosts and cuts the low frequencies of the sound from 0 to 10. • VIB/OFF/CHORUS: this is a three position switch; ∙ When set to Off, the sound will not be affected by chorus or vibrato. ∙ When set to Vib, vibrato will be turned On. ∙ When set to Chorus, chorus will be turned On. • SPEED: sets the speed of the Vibrato effect from 0 to 10. Note that Chorus has no settings. • DEPTH: sets the intensity of the Vibrato effect from 0 to 10. Note that Chorus has no settings. 298 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Dr. Z Amplification® MAZ 18 Jr. Officialli Certified Dr. Z Amplification® MAZ 18 Jr.™ Combo Model This amp features EL84 output tubes, 12AX7 and 12AT7 preamp tubes, along with a GZ34 rectifier tube, and delivers a much bigger sound than its 18W rating would indicate. Our model faithfully recreates the smooth top end and tight bass response of the amp’s tone, as well as its awesome 3D reverb. Whether you’re using humbuckers or single-coil pickups, the MAZ 18 Jr. will deliver plenty of definition, headroom and signature tone. Controls: • VOLUME: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage from 0 to 10. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the treble frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. • MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. • BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. • REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound from 0 to 10. • CUT: adjusts the high frequencies of the EQ stage, from 0 to 10. • MASTER: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage from 0 to 10. 299 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Z Wreck Officially Certified Dr. Z Amplification®Z Wreck™ Head Model It rocks, it twangs, and it provides incredible touch sensitivity to go along with killer tone. Push the volume past 12, on this 30W tube head and it will start getting crunchy. Turn the volume up higher and listen to it scream. With the amp set for crunch, roll off your guitar volume to get a clean tone without harshness. Controls: • • • • 300 CUT: adjusts the high frequencies of the EQ stage, from 0 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the treble frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage from 0 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Engl® E650 Officially Certified ENGL® E650™ Head Model This model is based on the Engl E650 amp head which was designed as an evolution of the previous Savage technology. The amp design features two switchable channels with selectable HI/LO gain ranges, which share EQ settings, additional contour and bright switches to fine tune midrange and high end response. This effectively makes it a four channel amp. For this reason the E650 is capable of a vast array of tones, from sparkling cleans to bone crunching distortions and lead tones. Many in between and crunch sounds can be found by judiciously setting the gain and tone controls. . Controls: • • • • • • • • • • 301 GAIN LO/HI: selects the gain range for the current channel. CLEAN/LEAD: toggles between the Clean and Lead channels. CLEAN: sets the input gain for the Clean channel preamp stage. LEAD: sets the input gain for the Lead channel preamp stage. BRIGHT: boosts the high end part of the frequency spectrum, active on Clean channel. BASS: sets the low end amount for both channels. MIDDLE: sets the midrange amount for both channels. TREBLE: sets the high end amount for both channels. LEAD PRESENCE: sets the high end presence for the Lead channel. LEAD VOLUME: sets the output level of the Lead channel. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • MASTER A LO GAIN: sets the level of the Lo Gain mode for both channels. • MASTER B HI GAIN: sets the level of the HI Gain mode for both channels. • CONTOUR: boosts the low end response of the Lead channel. 302 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Powerball Officially Certified ENGL® Powerball™ Head Model The Powerball is based on one of the most powerful modern high-gain amplifiers from the Engl brand. It’s highly regarded for its heavy rhythm tones and its many sound-sculpting options. The Powerball has two main channels, and then each channel has two different modes. Channel I offers “Clean” and “Crunch,” and Channel II has “Low Lead” and “High Lead.” The Powerball has the power and flexibility to create everything from modern super high-gain leads to heavy crunch rhythms to crystal-clear clean tones. Global Controls: • CH I/II: selects between Channel I and Channel II. • OPEN/FOCUSED: this button lets you select between two different midrange styles. Choose open for a looser tone, focused for a tighter mid-range voicing. It affects all channels. • GAIN LO/HI. : when you press this button, the input sensitivity of both Main channels is increased. The Hi-Gain function switches from Clean to Crunch in Channel I, and from Lo Lead to Hi Lead in Channel II. • PRESENCE: determines the amount of high-end frequencies and affects all channels, from 1 to 10. • D.-PUNCH: determines the amount of low-end frequencies from 1 to 10. Affects all channels. • MASTER: adjusts the global output level from 1 to 10. Controls for Channel I (Clean and Crunch mode): • CH I GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the channel I preamp stage from 1 to 10. • BRIGHT: boosts the upper end of the high frequency range. • BOTTOM: boosts the low end of the frequency range. 303 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. • MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. • TREBLE-CL.: this control boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage when “Clean mode” is selected. From 1 to 10. • TREBLE-CR.: this control boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage when “Crunch mode” is selected. From 1 to 10. • CL.-VOLUME: adjusts the level of the Clean mode. The green LED to the right of the knob lights up to indicate Clean mode is on. • CR.-VOLUME: adjusts the level of the Crunch mode. The green LED to the right of the knob lights up to indicate Crunch mode is on. Controls for Channel II (Low Lead and High Lead mode): • • • • • • • • • 304 CH II GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the channel 2 preamp stage from 1 to 10. LO LEAD BOTTOM: boosts the low end of the frequency range. (Low Lead mode only) HI LEAD BOTTOM: boosts the low end of the frequency range. (High Lead mode only) BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. (Low Lead and High Lead mode) MID-OPEN: this control determines the response of a specific mid frequency range when sound style “OPEN” is selected. From 1 to 10. MID-FOCUSED: this control determines the response of a specific mid frequency range when sound style “FOCUSED” is selected. From 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. LO LEAD VOL.: adjusts the level of the Low lead mode. The green LED to the right of the knob lights up to indicate Low lead mode is on. HI LEAD VOL.: adjusts the level of the High Lead mode. The green LED to the right of the knob lights up to indicate High lead mode is on. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Fender® ’57 Deluxe Officially Certified Fender® ’57 Deluxe™ (Inst. Channel) Model One of the first amplifiers designed by Leo Fender, and one of the most influential. The Tweed Deluxe provides classic compressed overdriven tones when cranked, and rich harmonic clean tones when played at low volumes. The Deluxe is a great amplifier for Chicago-style Blues tones, as well as Country and early Rock and Roll tones. Today, modern players of all stripes use a Deluxe in the studio to create their own “tone magic.” Controls: • TONE: shifts the tonal balance from low to high frequencies from 1 (low) to 12 (high). • INST. VOL.: adjusts the output level of the ’57 Deluxe’s power amp stage from 1 to 12. 305 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Pro Junior Officially Certified Fender® Pro Junior™ (Single Channel) Model The Pro Junior, with its single volume and tone controls, is a unique marriage of classic Fender® tone at low volumes and angry bite when cranked. This amp is excellent at achieving touch-sensitive overdriven studio tones, and players everywhere have discovered the simple joys of plugging in and turning up the volume for simple, pure Blues and Rock performance. Controls: • TONE: shifts the tonal balance from low to high frequencies from 1 (low) to 12 (high). • VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the Pro Junior’s power amp stage from 1 to 12. 306 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models ’64 Vibroverb Custom Officially Certified Fender® ’64 Vibroverb™ Custom (Vibrato Channel, both Stock and Mod modes) Model A hand-wired reissue specifically based on Stevie Ray Vaughan’s original Vibroverb, as modified by “Amp Doctor” Cesar Diaz. Its Blackface circuit and 15” speaker create a shimmering clean tone that is perfect for Jazz or Country. With the available “Mod” mode, the Vibroverb Custom can create the famous Texas Blues tone with its touch of preamp tube distortion and punchy mid focus. Controls: • • • • BASS: adjusts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. TREBLE: adjusts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage from 1 to 10. MOD: when engaged, gain is increased, as well as overall brightness. This control also disconnects the Vibrato controls from the circuit. • REVERB: controls the amount of Reverb from 1 to 10. • SPEED: controls the speed of the Vibrato effect from 1 to 10. • INTENSITY: controls the intensity of the Vibrato effect from 1 to 10. 307 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models ’65 Deluxe Reverb Officially Certified Fender® ’65 Deluxe Reverb® Model A true classic that delivers classic Country and Rock tones from Nashville to Liverpool. The Deluxe Reverb has a bright, punchy attack that is perfect for finger-picking, Garage-Rock... just about anything. The Deluxe Reverb is an amp that has been used on countless recordings due to its pure tube tone, great Reverb and Tremolo, and amazing versatility. Controls: • • • • • • 308 Bass: adjusts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. Treble: adjusts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. Volume: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage from 1 to 10. Reverb: controls the amount of Reverb from 1 to 10. Speed: controls the speed of the Vibrato effect from 1 to 10. Intensity: controls the intensity of the Vibrato effect from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models ’65 Twin Reverb Officially Certified Fender® ’65 Twin Reverb® (Vibrato Channel) Model One of the most distinctive amps of all time. It delivers a shimmering, pure clean tone that is perfect for any style of music, yet it will bark when turned up to arena volume. The Twin Reverb® is known as the first popular “builtin effects” amp, with world-standard Fender® Reverb and Tremolo. This is also a great amplifier for accentuating the character of external stomp boxes, making it an incredibly versatile platform to build on. Controls: • • • • • • • • 309 BRIGHT: provides a high-frequency presence boost. BASS: adjusts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. MID: adjusts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. TREBLE: adjusts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp from 1 to 10. REVERB: controls the amount of Reverb from 1 to 10. SPEED: controls the speed of the Vibrato effect from 1 to 10. INTENSITY: controls the intensity of the Vibrato effect from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Super-Sonic Officially Certified Fender® Super-Sonic™ “Burn” Channel Model A marriage of classic Fender® tone and modern versatility, perfect for everything from vintage clean tones to 70’s-style Classic Rock crunch to modern Metal and Punk. Its independent cascading gain stages and custom EQ allow guitarists to create a huge variety of both vintage and modern harder-edged distorted tones, all while retaining that unmistakable Fender® character. Controls: • • • • • • • 310 GAIN 1: adjusts the input gain of the first set of preamp stages from 1 to 10. GAIN 2: adjusts the input gain of the second set of preamp stages from 1 to 10. BASS: adjusts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. MIDDLE: adjusts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. TREBLE: adjusts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage from 1 to 10. REVERB: controls the amount of Reverb from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Vibro-King Officially Certified Fender® Vibro-King® Custom Model This modern Fender® classic provides incredible clean tones, unequalled touch sensitivity, and a thick overdrive character that will inspire artistic inspiration for any player. Engaging the FAT switch helps boost it into classic Rock distortion. The Vibro-King® also contains Fender®’s unique ’63 Reverb circuit, which means this amplifier is a perfect choice for Country, Blues, and Surf players, as well. Controls: • • • • • • • • • • 311 DWELL: controls the amount of the reverb effect from 1 to 10. MIX: adjusts the amount of Reverb mixed into the output signal from 1 to 10. TONE: adjusts the tone of the Reverb signal from 1 to 10. FAT: boosts preamp gain in the mid-frequency range, for classic overdriven tones. VOLUME: adjusts the loudness of the amplifier from 1 to 10. BASS: adjusts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. MIDDLE: adjusts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. TREBLE: adjusts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. SPEED: adjusts the rate of the Vibrato effect from 1 to 10. INTENSITY: adjusts the depth of the Vibrato effect from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models ’59 Bassman Officially Certified Fender® ’59 Bassman® LTD (Bright Channel) Model Quite possibly the most famous guitar amp of all time, the tweed Bassman® is considered a must-have for any serious tone connoisseur. Originally conceived in the 1950s to amplify the newly invented Fender® Precision Bass® guitar, it was quickly adopted by guitarists who found that it was able to provide shimmering clean tones and a cranked up “crunch” tone that lent itself perfectly to Rock and Roll. That tone became the basis for the famous British “stacks” of the 60s and beyond. Played clean or distorted from Rock to Blues to Country, with or without external effects, the ’59 Bassman® is the foundation for a wide variety of great tones. Controls: • • • • • 312 PRESENCE: boosts the high frequencies of the EQ stage from 1 to 12. BASS: adjusts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 12. MIDDLE: adjusts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 12. TREBLE: adjusts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 12. VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the Bassman®’s power amp stage from 1 to 12. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Bassman 300 Officially Certified Fender® Bassman® 300 (Channels 1&2) Model The Bassman® 300 PRO produces warm all-tube bass tone and combines it with modern flexibility. Features like 10-band graphic EQ, mid-notch switch (great for slap playing), two-band studio-grade compressor, and clean and overdrive channels make the Bassman® 300 a great choice for any bass player. Controls: • • • • • • • • • • • CH 1 VOLUME: adjusts the loudness of channel 1 from 1 to 10. CH 2 GAIN: adjusts the channel 2 gain/distortion level from 1 to 10. CH 2 VOLUME: adjusts the loudness of channel 2 from 1 to 10. CH 1 / 2 MIX: mixes the channel 1 (clean) and channel 2 (overdrive) output levels. LOW: adjusts the Low frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. HIGH: adjusts the High frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. DEEP: low frequency boost when this button is IN. BRIGHT: high frequency boost when this button is IN. MID NOTCH: reduces the mid-frequency tones. GRAPHIC: activates the graphic equalizer. GRAPHIC EQ: the 10 band-pass / band-reject filters are spaced at octave intervals. Adjusts selected frequencies cut and boost from 1 to 10. • LOW COMP: adjusts the compression ratio below 400Hz. Clockwise rotation increases the amount of compression from 1 to 10. • COMP: activates the Compressor(s). • HIGH COMP: adjusts the compression ratio above 400Hz from 1 to 10. 313 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • COMP EQ BAL: mixes the low and high compressor balance from 1 to 10. • COMP GAIN TRIM: this knob adjusts gain to compensate for any level imbalance when the compression circuitry has been engaged from 1 to 10. • MASTER VOLUME: adjusts the overall loudness of the amplifier from 1 to 10. 314 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Champion 600 Officially Certified Fender® Champion™ 600 Model The Champion™ 600 is an updated version of the classic Fender® practice amp, providing slightly more gain than the original model. With only a volume control, a clean, simple circuit with just one power tube and low wattage, its distinctive reedy tone has been used on countless Classic Rock recordings. Controls: VOLUME: adjusts the volume of the amp from 1 to 12. 315 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models MH-500 Metalhead Officially Certified Fender® MH-500 Metalhead™ (Loose Channel) Model Designed from the ground up to provide the perfect amp for modern down-tuned and 7-string guitarists, with a searing gain and a punishing low end that is perfect for more aggressive styles of Rock and Metal. Its solid-state power amp gives enough headroom for incredible note definition even when distorted, and the preamp has an unmatched amount of gain for lead players. Controls: • • • • • • 316 DRIVE: adjusts the amount of preamp distortion from low to high. PRESENCE: boosts the high frequencies of the EQ stage from low to high. BASS: adjusts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from low to high. MIDDLE: adjusts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from low to high. TREBLE: adjusts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from low to high. MASTER VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage from low to high. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models TBP-1 Officially Certified Fender® TBP-1 Pre-amp (Vintage Tube and Overdrive Channels) Model The TBP-1 is a truly professional tube bass preamp designed around Fender®’s passive tone stack (used in classic designs such as the Twin Reverb® and Showman®) which delivers creamy tube tone while allowing the color of the instrument to shine through. A tube overdrive section adds “bite”, while the Vari-Q™ circuit provides modern active tone shaping. Thick, natural and balanced; the TBP-1 is an amazing device for creating great bass tone. Controls: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 317 VOLUME: adjusts the loudness of the Vintage Tube Channel. BASS: adjusts the bass frequencies of the EQ stage from 1 to 10. DEEP: Extends the Bass EQ range. MIDDLE: adjusts the mid frequencies of the EQ stage from 1 to 10. TREBLE: adjusts the high frequencies of the EQ stage from 1 to 10. BRIGHT: Extends the Treble EQ range. ON (TUBE OVERDRIVE): switches between the Vintage and Tube Overdrive Channels. GAIN: adjusts the Tube Overdrive distortion level from 1 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the loudness of the Tube Overdrive channel from 1 to 10. BLEND: adjusts the mix of clean vintage tube tone with overdriven tube tone when the Tube Overdrive is enabled. ON (VARI-Q): enables VariQ™ semi-parametric EQ section. FREQ: selects the center of frequency range that the Level knob controls. LEVEL: adjusts the amount of boost or cut (±15dB) at the frequency selected by the Freq control. ROOM BALANCE: adjusts the Room Balance EQ. At the center position, the effect is neutral. Turned Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models clockwise, highs are emphasized (bright), while deemphasizing lows (deep). Turned clockwise, lows are emphasized (deep), while de-emphasizing highs (bright). • MUTE: mutes the amplifier while leaving it turned on. • MASTER VOLUME: adjusts the overall loudness of the amplifier from 1 to 10. 318 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models ’65 Princeton Officially Certified Fender® ’65 Princeton® Reverb Model For anybody who craves top – notch tube driven tone, naturally dynamic clean, overdriven tones, and unmistakable long Fender spring reverb and tube vibrato, here is the new ’65 Princeton Reverb Vintage Reissue. The legendary Princeton Reverb of the 1960s was originally intended for practice purposes, but thanks to its big tube tone and the countless guitarists that chose it as a studio amp, the ’65 Princeton Reverb became one of the legendary prize collectibles among Fender amps. Controls: • • • • • • 319 VOLUME: adjusts the volume of the power amp stage. Use this setting to drive the amp from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound from 1 to 10. SPEED: adjusts rate of the vibrato. Use this setting to set the rate of the vibrato from 1 to 10. INTENSITY: adjusts the amount of the vibrato. Use this set to amount of vibrato from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models ’57 Champ Officially Certified Fender® ’57 Champ™ Model Out of the late 1950s comes the prized compact tweed amp that is revered for both practice and recording because of its low, 5-watt output. With the volume turned all the way up, you can manipulate your tone using the guitar’s own controls to go from glassy clean to bluesy overdrive with the amp reacting to the input signal just the way you want it to. Small but mighty, the ‘57 Champ is a true classic that belongs in the amp collection of every dedicated guitarist. Controls: • VOLUME: adjusts the volume to the power amp stage. Use this setting to drive the amp from 1 to 10. 320 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models ’57 Custom Champ Officially Certified Fender® ’57 Custom Champ® Model Probably THE most recorded amp of all time, the Fender Champ provides an amazingly diverse tone palette for a small, single knob amp. The ’57 Custom Champ is the perfect companion for those who love dynamic, overdriven tones and crisp, classic cleans. Controls: • 1/2 switch: selects between inputs 1 and 2 allowing different tonal characters. • VOLUME: sets the volume of the amplifier; as the control is turned up the amount of power amp saturation increases, resulting in more distortion. • ON/OFF switch: bypasses or enables the amplifier. 321 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models ’57 Custom Deluxe Officially Certified ’57 Custom Deluxe™ Model One of the most loved Fender tweeds of all time, the ’57 Custom Deluxe has it all – virtually everything from sparkling cleans to major crunch and everything in between. The hand-wired all-tube 5E3 circuit is pure magic at all volume levels. Controls: • INST/MIC switch: selects between the instrument and mic channels, allowing different tonal characters and gain levels. • BRIDGE/SINGLE switch: allows you to bridge the two channels with the special jumper cable sitting on top of the amp. This can also be achieved by clicking directly on the cable itself. Bridging the channels will result in summing the gain stages of the two channels for increased distortion and overall fatter tone. • TONE: regulates the tonal character of the amplifier; counterclockwise position is the darkest tone, getting brighter as the control is turned up. • INST. VOL: sets the volume of the amplifier when the Instrument Channel is engaged; as the control is turned up the amount of power amp saturation increases, resulting in more distortion. • MIC. VOL: sets the volume of the amplifier when the Microphone Channel is engaged; as the control is turned up the amount of power amp saturation increases, resulting in more distortion. • ON/OFF switch: bypasses or enables the amplifier. 322 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models ’57 Custom Twin-Amp Officially Certified ’57 Custom Twin-Amp™ Model The ’57 Custom Twin-Amp is the original “low-powered” 40W tweed beauty known for its sweet, singing tone and responsive dynamics. The Tweed Twin delivers a luxurious clean tone that adds some richness, clarity and sparkle. Controls: BRIGHT /NORMAL switch: allows you to select between the Bright or Normal channel. PRESENCE: controls the overall amount of brightness and presence of the amp’s tone. BASS: controls the amount of low end of the tone. TREBLE: controls the amount of high end in amp’s tone. VOL. BRIGHT: sets the volume of the amplifier when the Bright Channel is engaged; as the control is turned up the amount of power amp saturation increases, resulting in more distortion; as in all non master volume amplifiers, the amount of distortion is also influenced by the level of the Bass and Treble controls. • VOL. NORMAL: sets the volume of the amplifier when the Normal Channel is engaged; as the control is turned up the amount of power amp saturation increases, resulting in more distortion; as in all non master volume amplifiers, the amount of distortion is also influenced by the level of the Bass and Treble controls. • ON/OFF switch: bypasses or enables the amplifier. • • • • • 323 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models ’57 Custom Pro-Amp Officially Certified ’57 Custom Pro-Amp Model The ’57 Custom Pro is based on the original Pro of the 50s, known for its rich harmonic content and it possesses a legendary flexible and vintage sound. The creamy overdrive and smooth presence are perfect for all vintage tones, and incredible for modern sounds. Controls: • INST/MIC switch: selects between the instrument and mic channels, allowing different tonal characters and levels of gain. • BRIDGE/SINGLE switch: allows you to bridge the two channels with the special jumper cable sitting on top of the amp. This can also be achieved by clicking directly on the cable itself. Bridging the channels will result in summing the gain stages of the two channels for increased distortion and overall fatter tone. • PRESENCE: controls the overall amount of brightness and presence of the amp’s tone. • BASS: controls the amount of low end of the tone. • TREBLE: controls the amount of high end in amp’s tone. • INST. VOL: sets the volume of the amplifier when the Bright Channel is engaged; as the control is turned up the amount of power amp saturation increases, resulting in more distortion; as in all non master volume amplifiers, the amount of distortion is also influenced by the level of the Bass and Treble controls. • MIC. VOL: sets the volume of the amplifier when the Normal Channel is engaged; as the control is turned up the amount of power amp saturation increases, resulting in more distortion; as in all non master volume amplifiers, the amount of distortion is also influenced by the level of the Bass and Treble controls. • ON/OFF switch: bypasses or enables the amplifier. 324 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models ’57 Bandmaster Officially Certified ’57 Bandmaster™ Model The ’57 Bandmaster provides Vintage blues tone through a 3x10 set-up and hand-wired all tube construction. Designed as a “plug straight in and turn it up” amp, the sound is flexible and fills the room with its vibe, giving the impression of a 3D surround sound. Controls: • INSTRUMENT/MIC switch: selects between the instrument and mic channels, allowing different tonal characters and levels of gain. • BRIDGE/SINGLE switch: allows you to bridge the two channels with the special jumper cable sitting on top of the amp. This can also be achieved by clicking directly on the cable itself. Bridging the channels will result in summing the gain stages of the two channels for increased distortion and overall fatter tone. • PRESENCE: controls the overall amount of brightness and presence of the amp’s tone. • BASS: controls the amount of low end of the tone. • TREBLE: controls the amount of high end in amp’s tone. • INST. VOL: sets the volume of the amplifier when the Bright Channel is engaged; as the control is turned up the amount of power amp saturation increases, resulting in more distortion; as in all non master volume amplifiers, the amount of distortion is also influenced by the level of the Bass and Treble controls. • MIC. VOL: sets the volume of the amplifier when the Normal Channel is engaged; as the control is turned up the amount of power amp saturation increases, resulting in more distortion; as in all non master volume amplifiers, the amount of distortion is also influenced by the level of the Bass and Treble controls. • ON/OFF switch: bypasses or enables the amplifier. 325 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models ’65 Super Reverb Officially Certified ’65 Super Reverb® Model The ’65 Super Reverb is another classic collectible workhorse amp that has a special place in tone history and in the hearts of players everywhere. With shimmering tone and vintage overdrive, this legendary blackface amp is a medium output stage-filling sound machine. Controls: • BRIGHT switch: engages the Bright circuit increasing the overall high end of the amplifier • VOLUME: sets the output volume of the amplifier. As the knob is turned up the output level of the amplifier will increase but also become more distorted as the power tubes clip and saturate. • TREBLE: controls the level of the high end; adjust carefully to avoid harsh and unbalanced tone, especially if the Bright switch is enabled. • MIDDLE: controls the level of the mids in the amp’s tone, where fully counterclockwise positions will result in a more hollow sound, while fully clockwise allows you to achieve more body and thickness. • BASS: sets the low end of the tone, adjust to taste and to suit the tone of the guitar you are using. • REVERB: controls the amount of the spring reverb mixed in with the direct, dry sound of the amplifier. • SPEED: controls the speed of the opto tremolo effect onboard the amp. Low values will result in a slow tremolo effect, while higher values will increase the speed for a more pronounced effect. • INTENSITY: controls the depth of the tremolo effect. Higher values will produce a more pronounced and choppy effect on the sound. • ON/OFF switch: bypasses or enables the amplifier. 326 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models ’53 Bassman Officially Certified ’53 Bassman® Model This model is based on an original Fender Bassman 26-watt 1x15” speaker bass amp, the first Fender bass amp ever created. It features an “aging” switch that lets you toggle between “new-old stock” or “worn” vintage for that well-aged, broken-in sound. Controls: • TONE: controls the tone circuit of the amp, lower values will result in a darker, rounder tone, while higher values will allow more high end to pass through. • VOLUME: controls the output level of the amplifier. Turning this control up will also increase the power tubes saturation for more distortion as volume gets louder. 327 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • ON/OFF switch: bypasses or enables the amplifier. • NEW/WORN OUT switch: switches between the “new old stock” version of the amp for the original sound and the “aged components” one which produces a more “lo-fi” sound with earlier breakup and an overall dirtier tone. GUI switches accordingly. 328 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Gallien-Krueger® MB 150 S Officially Certified Gallien-Krueger® MB150S™ Model This is a rendition of “the” bass combo for double bass. The tone doesn’t stop there, though. Electric bassists have used this tiny but mighty (and toneful) combo amp with great success. Great things can come in small sizes, and can sound surprisingly big and full. Controls: • VOLUME: sets the gain of the preamp stage. • CONTOUR: set it at min for a flat and natural sound, rise it to gradually mix in a midrange scoop that makes the tone more big and “processed.” • HI BOOST: delivers a gradual boost on mid and high frequencies. • LOW CUT ON/OFF: when enabled extremely low frequencies are removed by the preamp. This is to avoid overloading the amp because of unwanted low frequencies content. • TREBLE: sets the amount of high frequencies on the sound. • HI MIDDLE: sets the amount of mid high frequencies on the sound. • LOW MIDDLE: sets the amount of mid low frequencies on the sound. • BASS: sets the amount of low frequencies on the sound. • OUTPUT LEVEL: sets the volume of the power amp stage. • LIMITER: enables the built-in Limiter. When enabled the power amp is protected from overloading. • LIMITER LEVEL: sets the threshold for the limiter to trigger in. When set lower the limiter will trigger in sooner, and when set to higher values the limiter will trigger in at higher levels. 329 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Jet City Amplification 333® JCA20H Officially Certified Jet City Amplification 333® JCA20H™ Head Model Pure, simple and full of tube tone, JCA20H is a single-channel amp with absolutely no gimmicks or unnecessary features that might otherwise dilute the all-tube signal path. With full EQ control and separate Preamp and Master volumes, JCA20H can deliver tones from spanky clean through crunchy overdrive. Controls: • • • • • • 330 PREAMP GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage from 1 to 9. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 9. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 9. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 9. MASTER VOLUME: adjusts the final output level of the power amp stage from 1 to 9. PRESENCE: boosts high frequencies for both preamp channels from 1 to 9. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models JCA100H Officially Certified Jet City Amplification 333® JCA100H™ Head Model With two channels of Soldano tone and its pure tube power, this amp was made for the big stage. The Normal channel has plenty of headroom to deliver clear, bright clean tones and can also be driven hard enough to get downright raunchy. The Overdrive channel is based on the the circuit that made Soldano famous. Controls: • NORMAL-OVERDRIVE: the Bright Switch offers sparkling highs to the Normal channel adding to its versatility. • NORMAL PREAMP: adjusts the input gain of the Normal channel preamp stage from 1 to 9. • OVERDRIVE PREAMP: adjusts the input gain of the Overdrive channel preamp stage from 1 to 9. • BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 9. • MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 9. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 9. • NORMAL MASTER: adjusts the final output level of the Normal channel to the power amp stage from 1 to 9. • OVERDRIVE MASTER: adjusts the final output level of the Overdrive channel to the power amp stage from 1 to 9. • PRESENCE: boosts high frequencies for both preamp channels from 1 to 9. 331 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Jimi Hendrix American Vintage B Based on Fender® Bassman® The design of this amp influenced many of its successors and was used by Jimi Hendrix in the studio recording of “Voodoo Child”. Controls: • • • • • • 332 GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 1 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. PRESENCE: boost the high frequencies of the EQ stage, from 1 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage, from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models American Vintage D Base on Fender® Dual Showman® Jimi Hendrix acquired this 100 watt amp in 1968 and used it in 1968-1969 with the Experience tour, together with an assortment of other amps. The amp sported a built-in spring reverb unit.. Controls: • • • • • • • • 333 GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 1 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. PRESENCE: boost the high frequencies of the EQ stage, from 1 to 10. SPRING REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound, from 1 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage, from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models American Vintage T Based on Fender® Twin Reverb® This was Jimi Hendrix’s amp of choice during 1965 through 1966. It included a spring reverb. Controls: • • • • • • • 334 GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 1 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. PRESENCE: boost the high frequencies of the EQ stage, from 1 to 10. SPRING REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound, from 1 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage, from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models British Lead S100 Based on Marshall® 1959 JTM100™ Super Lead This amp is modeled on the Classic British 100 watt amp Jimi Hendrix is generally associated with. Jimi Hendrix often used multiple amp heads (up to 6) looping them together to get more power, a setup that can be recreated in AmpliTube 5 because of its dual rig capability. Controls: • • • • • • • 335 GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 1 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. PRESENCE: boost the high frequencies of the EQ stage, from 1 to 10. SPRING REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound, from 1 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage, from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models JH 1200 Based on Sunn® 1200S™ The JH 1200 is an high-powered tube bass head. Concertgoers at any Hendrix show between 1967 and 1968 would have seen an entire backline consisting of Sunn amps and cabinets. As with many amps from the psychedelic era, the ultra-loud 1200 was popular with both guitarists and bass players. Controls: • VOLUME: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 0 to 10. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the very high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. • BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. • CONTOUR: boosts and cuts the mid and high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. • RATE: sets the speed of the tremolo effect, from 0 to 10. • DEPTH: sets the intensity of the Tremolo, from 0 to 10. • REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound, from 0 to 10. • MID BOOST: Boosts the mid frequencies. 336 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models JH Gold Based on Marshall® JTM45™ “The” amp that Jimi Hendrix used almost exclusively from 1968 on. He liked to crank it to full volume and chain multiple heads to produce a huge, mind-blowing wall of sound. The new model has been reworked from the ground up, using IK’s DSM™ and SCC™ modeling technologies, and includes both the Normal and Treble channels, plus fully modeled channel bridging. Controls: PRESENCE: boosts the high frequencies of the EQ stage, from 0 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. HI TREBLE (Loudness 1): adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the Hi Treble Channel, from 0 to 10. • NORMAL (Loudness 2): adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the Normal Channel, from 0 to 10. • NORMAL - Hi TREBLE SWITCH: switches between Normal and High Treble Channel. • BRIDGE: enables channel bridging. Use the Bridge option to add more drive. • • • • • 337 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models SilverTwelve Based on Silvertone® Twin Twelve 1484™ A 60W tube head which Hendrix used in the early part of his career. The amp produces a powerful clean sound, as well as a gritty distortion that has stood the test of time from the psychedelic era through the Grunge period and into today’s modern rock. Global Controls: • CH.1 - CH.2 SWITCH: switches between Channel One and Channel Two. Controls for Channel One: • VOLUME: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 0 to 10. • BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. Controls for Channel Two: • VOLUME: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 0 to 10. • BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. • DEPTH REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound, from 0 to 10. • STRENGTH TREMOLO: sets the intensity of the Tremolo, from 0 to 10. • SPEED TREMOLO: sets the speed of the tremolo effect, from 0 to 10. 338 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Joe Satriani Satch VM Based on Marshall® JVM410HJS This versatile four-channel amp offers incredible tones possibilities. Customized to Joe’s unique design, this amp offers three modes per channel, along with independent noise filters and re-biased presence & resonance controls. Controls: • MODE: Switches between Clean, Crunch, OD1 and OD2 channels and each channel between green, orange and red mode. • GATE ON: Activates noise gate for the currently selected channel. • GATE: Adjusts the noise gate sensitivity for the currently selected channel. • VOLUME: Adjusts the overall output level of the selected channel, from 0 to 10. This works only for Crunch, OD1 and OD2 channels. • BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. • MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. • MID SHIFT: Activates mid shift filter for OD1 or OD2 channel. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the treble frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. • GAIN: Adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage for the currently selected channel, from 0 to 10. • MASTER TYPE: Switches between Master 1 and 2. • RESONANCE: Boosts the speaker bottom end resonance for the currently selected master from 0 to 10. 339 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • PRESENCE: Boosts high frequencies above the treble control for the currently selected master from 0 to 10. • VOLUME: Adjusts the overall output level of the power amp stage for the currently selected master, from 0 to 10. 340 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models SJ50 Based on the Peavey® 5150 This legendary amp was originally a signature model for Eddie Van Halen, but its iconic sound became soon the staple tone of many hard rock and heavy metal artists, including Joe Satriani himself. Controls: CHANNEL: Switches between clean and distortion channel. BRIGHT: Activates bright mode in clean channel. CRUNCH: Activates crunch mode in clean channel. PRE GAIN: Adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage for the currently selected channel, from 0 to 10. LOW: Boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. MID: Boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. HIGH: Boosts and cuts the treble frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. MASTER: Adjusts the overall output level of the power amp stage for the currently selected channel, from 0 to 10. • RESONANCE: Boosts the speaker bottom end resonance from 0 to 10. • PRESENCE: Boosts high frequencies above the treble control from 0 to 10. • • • • • • • • 341 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Boston 100 Based on the Tom Scholz Rockman® X100 This early amp sim has long been used in the studio by Joe thanks to its unique take on late 70’s rock sound as typified by Boston, with 4 different amp settings and Chorus and Echo effects. Controls: • • • • • 342 INPUT GAIN: Adjusts the input gain of the unit from -8dB to +8dB. ECHO: Activates echo effect. CHORUS: Activates chorus effect. CHANNEL: Switches between 2 different clean, edge and dist channels. VOL: Switches between 3 different output levels. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Leslie® 122 Officially Certified Leslie® 122 Amp Model The classic of classics. Suitable for pop, rock, jazz and blues, when you think of the “Leslie sound,” you are most likely thinking of a 122. A vintage unit from the early 70s has been modeled here, and this has a slightly warmer sound when compared to the 122A. Controls: • • • • 343 GAIN: controls the amount of signal going to the amp and the level of saturation. VOLUME: controls the amount of signal going into the Cabinet. INPUT HPF: controls the frequency of the high pass filtering of the input signal from OFF to 200Hz. EQ: a guitar-amp style equalizer with controls for Low, Mid and High frequencies. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 122A Officially Certified Leslie® 122A Amp Model The Leslie 122A is the modern take on the most famous Leslie model with a balanced input to the amplifier and a medium-tall cabinet that provides superb bass response. This has a slightly more open and upfront tone when compared to the classic 122. Controls: • • • • 344 GAIN: controls the amount of signal going to the amp and the level of saturation. VOLUME: controls the amount of signal going into the Cabinet. INPUT HPF: controls the frequency of the high pass filtering of the input signal from OFF to 200Hz. EQ: a guitar-amp style equalizer with controls for Low, Mid and High frequencies. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 147 Officially Certified Leslie® 147 Amp Model The Leslie 147 is another classic Leslie model with a different connector, slightly different power amp, an unbalanced input to the amplifier and slightly shorter cabinet. The overall sound is similar to the classic 122 but with some noticeably and musically relevant differences. The one we modeled is a vintage unit from the mid 60s, with no reflectors on the horns, which gives another flavor to the sound and an even more tangible sonic difference from the classic 122. Controls: • • • • 345 GAIN: controls the amount of signal going to the amp and the level of saturation. VOLUME: controls the amount of signal going into the Cabinet. INPUT HPF: controls the frequency of the high pass filtering of the input signal from OFF to 200Hz. EQ: a guitar-amp style equalizer with controls for Low, Mid and High frequencies. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 3300w Officially Certified Leslie® 3300w Amp Model The Leslie 3300w is one of the most powerful models ever, featuring a 300-Watt RMS solid state amplifier with a real vacuum tube preamp. Its sound signature is especially suitable for pop, rock, jazz and blues. Controls: • GAIN: controls the amount of signal going to the amp and the level of saturation. • VOLUME: controls the amount of signal going into the Cabinet. • TUBE DRIVE: controls the amount of signal being “warmed up” by the tube section. When at minimum, the amp is set to the clean channel. As soon as the knob is turned up, it automatically switches to the drive channel. • TUBE MODE: controls the amount of tube saturation from Soft to Hard • EQ: a guitar-amp style equalizer with controls for Low, Mid and High frequencies. 346 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models G37 / Studio12 Officially Certified Leslie® G37 / Studio12 Amp Model Guitarists of all kinds praise the G37 for its unmistakable tonal character. The onboard solid state guitar amplifier with its tube preamp section can go from pristine clean to down-and-dirty for a variety of tonal nuances that only Leslie speakers can provide through a compact dual-rotor cabinet with a vintage voiced V30 12” speaker suited to guitar. The Studio 12, designed as a more portable amp for keyboard players, also uses a tube-driven solid state amplifier into a dual rotor design but has a 12” Eminence bass speaker tailored to the wider low frequency range of organs. The G37 and Studio 12 amps are the same – only their cabinets are different. Clean Channel Controls: • VOLUME: controls the amount of signal going into the Cabinet. Overdrive Channel Controls: • • • • 347 GAIN: controls the amount of signal going to the amp and the level of saturation. VOLUME: controls the amount of signal going into the Cabinet. CONTOUR: controls the amount of “warmth” created by the tube of the preamp. EQ: a guitar-amp style equalizer with controls for Low, Mid and High frequencies. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Marshall® - Slash AFD 100 Officially Certified Slash-Marshall® AFD100 Model The most aggressive amp head used by Slash. A dual mode amplifier that revisits the legendary tones of one of the most important rock albums of the last three decades: “Appetite for Destruction”. Controls: • • • • • • • 348 #34 / AFD SWITCH: selects #34 or AFD channel. PRESENCE: boosts the high frequencies of the EQ stage, from 1 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. MASTER: adjusts the overall output level of the power amp stage, from 0 to 10. GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 0 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models JCM Slash Officially Certified Slash-Marshall® JCM SLASH 2555SL Model The Marshal®l JCM Slash was designed to the specs of Slash’s original 1987 Marshall® Silver Jubilee 2555 amplifier. It was the first amplifier built by Marshall as a signature model. Controls: • • • • • • • • • 349 LEAD CH. SWITCH: enables the Lead Channel. RHYTHM SWITCH: adds more Gain to he preamp stage. PRESENCE: boosts the high frequencies of the EQ stage, from 1 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. OUTPUT MASTER: adjusts the overall output level of the power amp stage, from 0 to 10. LEAD MASTER: adjusts the output level of the Lead Channel, from 0 to 10. GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 0 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models MESA/Boogie® Mark III Officially Certified MESA/Boogie® Mark III™ Combo Model Originally introduced in 1984, the MESA/Boogie Mark III was the first 3-channel “Tri-Modal Amplifier.” It features an amazing set of sonic sculpting options plus a three-channel setup: Rhythm, a distinct midrange “Crunch” Rhythm and a Lead channel. Each has its own independent gain and master volume controls. Just like on the hardware counterpart, it sports a full spread of tone controls plus the vitally important Boogie 5-band Graphic EQ section. Front Panel Controls: • VOLUME: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage from 0 to 10. • PULL-BRIGHT: adds brightness to Rhythm 1 and Rhythm 2 clean sounds. Its effect diminishes as Volume 1 is turned up and has no effect when the Volume is at 10. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. • PULL-SHIFT: increases the upper-midrange drive in Lead Mode only. • BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. • PULL-SHIFT: alters bass frequencies to fit guitar pickup type: pulled-out for single coil and pushed-in for humbucker pickups. 350 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. • PULL-RHY2: activates the Rhythm 2 circuitry for added chunky crunchy character. • MASTER: adjusts the final output level of the power amp stage from 0 to 10. • PULL-DEEP: adds fatness and body, mostly for single coil pickups. • LEAD DRIVE: adjusts the input gain of the Lead Channel from 0 to 10. • PULL-LEAD: engages Lead Channel mode. • LEAD MASTER: adjusts the final output level of the lead channel to the power amp stage from 0 to 10. • PULL-BRIGHT: adds brightness to the Lead Channel. Intended for low volume playing. • EQ ON/OFF: toggles the Graphic EQ on/off. • GRAPHIC EQ: this 5-band graphic EQ allows you to shape your tone. The V shape is a classic setup, vastly used on Mark amps. • BACK: access the rear panel for further controls. Rear Panel Controls: • PRESENCE: boosts high frequencies from 0 to 10. • REVERB: controls the amount of reverb coming from the internal spring unit from 0 to 10. • CLASS A / SIMUL-CLASS: switches between two different power amp configurations. CLASS A uses only two power tubes and provides 15 Watts and a great degree of power tube distortion. SIMUL-CLASS uses four power tubes for more power and headroom. • FRONT: go back to the front panel. 351 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Mark IV Officially Certified MESA/Boogie® Mark IV™ Combo Model The very definition of Mesa Engineering’s signature high-gain sound, this update of the classic Mark III design from 1990 takes that unmistakable Boogie tone and makes it even better and more sonically versatile. Three big sounds with individual controls and total conviction define the tonal palette for this powerhouse of a unit. Its three channels deliver an incredibly wide sonic palette that stretches from sparkling cleans to ultra high-gain lead sounds that are rich with harmonics and sustain. Front Panel Controls: • RHY 1 GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the Rhythm 1 channel from 0 to 10. • BRIGHT: this function adds shimmer and sparkle to your sound when activated. Note that the amount of added brightness varies with the R1 GAIN setting: more brights at lower settings, less at higher. • RHY 2 GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the Rhythm 2 channel from 0 to 10. • FAT: When pushed in, RHYTHM 2 loses gain in the low mids and the sound reveals more of your guitar’s inherent personality. • • • • R1 TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the Rhythm 1 Channel from 0 to 10. R1+R2 BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the Rhythm 1 and 2 Channels from 0 to 10. R1+R2 MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the Rhythm 1 and 2 Channels from 0 to 10. R2 TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the Rhythm 2 Channel from 0 to 10. • LEAD GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the Rhythm 2 channel from 0 to 10. 352 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • FAT: thickens the sound and saturates the signal further. It lowers the frequency of the treble, adding a boost in the lower midrange, adding focus at virtually any setting of the GAIN control. • LEAD TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the Lead Channel from 0 to 10. • LEAD BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the Lead Channel from 0 to 10. • LEAD MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the Lead Channel from 0 to 10. • LEAD DRIVE: works in conjunction with LEAD GAIN to determine the amount of sustain and overdrive. • BRIGHT: adds desirable sizzle, and gain in the highs to the overdrive sound. • R1: engages the rhythm 1 channel. • R2: engages the rhythm 2 channel. • LD: engages the lead channel. • R1 MASTER: adjusts the final output level of the Rhythm 1 channel to the power amp stage from 0 to 10. • R2 MASTER: adjusts the final output level of the Rhythm 2 channel to the power amp stage from 0 to 10. • LD MASTER: adjusts the final output level of the Lead channel to the power amp stage from 0 to 10. • R1 PRESENCE: boosts high frequencies of the rhythm 1 channel from 0 to 10. • R2 PRESENCE: boosts high frequencies of the rhythm 2 channel from 0 to 10. • SHIFT: alters the working frequency range of the presence effect. • LD PRESENCE: boosts high frequencies of the lead channel from 0 to 10. • SHIFT: alters the working frequency range of the presence effect. • EQ: enables the graphic EQ. • GRAPHIC EQ: this 5-band graphic EQ allows you to shape your tone. The V shape is a classic setup commonly used on Mark amps. • BACK: access the rear panel for further controls. 353 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Rear Panel Controls: • REVERB: controls the amount of reverb coming from the internal spring unit from 0 to 10. • TRIODE / PENTODE: this switch reconfigures the circuitry for the two outer-end power tubes. PENTODE increases power and punch resulting in a harder clip. TRIODE lowers the power and softens and smooths the onset of clipping. This makes it easier to get a rich singing sound full of sustain and harmonics, but some headroom is sacrificed for this sweeter response. • CLASS A / SIMUL-CLASS: switches between two different power amp configurations. CLASS A uses only two power tubes and provides 15Watts and a great degree of power tube distortion. SIMUL-CLASS uses four power tubes for more power and headroom. • HARMONICS / MID GAIN: this switch affects the LEAD mode only. MID GAIN adds gain in the mid-range “punch” region and is most noticeable when the LEAD DRIVE control is set very low - at the “threshold of distortion”. HARMONICS yields a more balanced harmonic spectrum more suitable for loud high gain lead playing. • FRONT: go back to the front panel. 354 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Dual Rectifier Officially Certified MESA/Boogie® Dual Rectifier® Head Model Soul, personality and feel: The MESA/Boogie Dual Rectifier is THE standard for modern high-gain heavy guitar tone and more. The Recto is an aggressive amplifier designed for aggressive players. It’s one of the most recorded amplifiers ever made and its tone can be heard rocking big-venue stages all over the world. Originally introduced in 1989, it delivers maximum flexibility of tone and has played a major role in defining the sound of grunge, metal and countless other heavy styles. It delivers 3-channel, 8-mode operation and varying levels of tube saturation as well as a virtually switchable tube/solid state rectifier section. Front Panel Controls: CH1 - Green Channel • • • • • • • PRESENCE: boosts high frequencies from 0 to 10. MASTER: adjusts the final output level of the power amp stage from 0 to 10. GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage from 0 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. CLEAN / PUSHED: selects two different flavors: a sweet shimmering clean or a raging crunch machine. CH2 CH3 - Orange and Red Channels: • PRESENCE: boosts high frequencies from 0 to 10. 355 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop • • • • • • Gear Models MASTER: adjusts the final output level of the power amp stage from 0 to 10. GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage from 0 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. RAW / VINTAGE / MODERN: selects three different flavors: the lowest gain RAW mode, the liquid Recto voice of the VINTAGE mode and the aggressive menacing power of the MODERN mode. • BACK: access the rear panel for further controls. Rear Panel Controls: • BIAS SWITCH: selects between 6L6 and EL34 power tubes. • RECTIFIER: switches between VACUUM TUBES (normal) and SILICONE DIODES (Hi Power) rectifier. Diode mode offers punch, attack and headroom. VACUUM TUBES offers a more vintage vibe with sweetness and a liquid feel. • POWER: switches between SPONGY or BOLD power modes. SPONGY mode offers a vintage feel with less headroom. BOLD mode offers the full power and headroom. • FRONT: go back to the front panel. 356 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Triple Rectifier Officially Certified MESA/Boogie® Triple Rectifier® Head Model The MESA/Boogie Triple Rectifier is THE standard for modern high gain heavy guitar tone and more. The MESA/ Boogie Triple Rectifier is an aggressive amplifier designed for aggressive players — it’s one of the most recorded amplifiers ever made and its tone can be heard rocking big-venue stages all over the world. Originally introduced in 1989, it delivers maximum flexibility of tone and has played a major role in defining the sound of grunge, metal and countless other heavy styles. It delivers 3-channel, 8-mode operation and varying levels of tube saturation as well as a virtually switchable tube/solid state rectifier section. Front Panel Controls: CH1 - Green Channel • • • • • • • PRESENCE: boosts high frequencies for both preamp channels from 0 to 10. MASTER: adjusts the final output level of the power amp stage from 0 to 10. GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage from 0 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. CLEAN / PUSHED: selects two different flavors: a sweet shimmering clean to a raging crunch machine. CH2 CH3 - Orange and Red Channels • PRESENCE: boosts high frequencies for both preamp channels from 0 to 10. 357 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop • • • • • • Gear Models MASTER: adjusts the final output level of the power amp stage from 0 to 10. GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage from 0 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. RAW / VINTAGE / MODERN: selects three different flavors: the lowest gain RAW mode, the liquid Recto voice of the VINTAGE mode and the aggressive menacing power of the MODERN mode. • BACK: access the rear panel for further controls. Rear Panel Controls: • BIAS SWITCH: selects between 6L6 and EL34 power tubes. • RECTIFIER: switches between VACUUM TUBES (normal) and SILICONE DIODES (Hi Power) rectifier. Diode mode offers punch, attack and headroom. Instead VACUUM TUBES offers a more vintage vibe with sweetness and a liquid feel. • POWER: switches between SPONGY or BOLD power modes. SPONGY mode offers a vintage feel with less headroom. BOLD mode offers the full power and headroom. • FRONT: go back to the front panel. 358 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Transatlantic TA-30 Officially Certified MESA/Boogie® TransAtlantic® Combo Model A decidedly British tribute of an amplifier, the TransAtlantic TA-30 mixes simplicity of operation with comprehensive sonic sculpting. It sports two-channel operation with 5 distinct “Mode” voice choices that reference not only several classic British circuits but also some American ones as well. Each channel features the flexibility of 3 levels of output power, allowing for powerful response and character. Throw in a Gain Boost feature and 2 high-gain options (HI 1 and HI 2 in Channel 2), and it’s easy to see why this model covers every sound from classic 60s to crushing contemporary and everything in between. Global Controls: • CH SW: channel selector. Channel 1 • NORMAL/TOP BOOST: switches between two modes: NORMAL for shimmering clean sounds and TOP BOOST for British clipped rhythm and lead sounds. • VOLUME: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage from 0 to 10. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. • BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. • REVERB: controls the amount of reverb coming from the internal spring unit from 0 to 10. • PULL: switches the CUT/MASTER knob between its two functionalities. • CUT/MASTER: when pushed-in this knob works as a high frequency cut (much like a reverse presence control). When pulled out it works as a normal master volume control. Both range from 0 to 10. • 15W/30W/40W: switches between three power tube configurations. 15W and 30W for a CLASS A classic 359 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models configuration. 40W for more headroom and power. Channel 2 • TWEED/HI 1/HI 2: Switches between three modes. TWEED for Southern California clean/crunch sounds. HI 1 for Brit sounds ranging from vintage crunch to crisp and searing high-gain solo sounds. HI 2 for a fatter and rounder version of HI 1 best for single note work. • PULL: engages a gain boost in all three modes. • GAIN/BOOST: adjusts the gain of the preamp stage from 0 to 10. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. • BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 0 to 10. • REVERB: controls the amount of reverb coming from the internal spring unit, from 0 to 10. • MASTER: adjusts the final output level of the power amp stage from 0 to 10. • 15W/30W/40W: switches between three power tube configurations. 15W and 30W for a CLASS A classic configuration and 40W for more headroom and power. 360 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Triple Crown Officially Certified MESA/Boogie® Triple Crown™ Model Aimed at rock’s high gain tones the Triple Crown can inspire and conquer with its unique circuitry and bold voice unlike anything in the Mesa/Boogie line. From bubbly, sparkly clean sound to an amazingly tight and aggressive wall of Rock Crunch. Experience one of the most vocal, harmonically rich and gain laded high gain channels ever in this new generation amplifier. Common controls for all channels: • • • • • • • PRES: this control sets up the basic brightness of the overall tone. MASTER: determines the level that is sent to the power amp for the channel. GAIN: sets the gain of the channel. BASS: sets the amount of low frequencies on the sound. MID: sets the amount of mid frequencies on the sound. TREBLE: sets the amount of high frequencies on the sound. WATT SELECTOR: selects the power for the channel among 3W, 7W, 20W, 50W and 100W. Other controls: • • • • • 361 SOLO: sets the solo boost when the solo function is activated. OUTPUT: sets the master output of the amplifier. HI CHANNEL TIGHT/NORM SWITCH: selects the preamp mode for HI channel. LO CHANNEL TIGHT/NORM SWITCH: selects the preamp mode for LO channel. CLEAN CHANNEL DRIVE/NORM SWITCH: selects the preamp mode for the clean channel. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • HI/LO/CL: selects the active channel. • BACK: access the back panel controls. Rear Panel controls: • • • • • • • 362 SOLO ON/OF (back): activates the solo function. REVERB ON/OFF (back): activates the reverb for all channels. CLEAN REVERB LEVEL (back): sets the amount of reverb for the clean channel. LO REVERB LEVEL (back): sets the amount of reverb for the LO channel. HI REVERB LEVEL (back): sets the amount of reverb for the HI channel. EL34/6L6 (back): sets the power tubes type. FRONT (back): access to the front panel controls. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Mark IIC+ Officially Certified MESA/Boogie® Mark IIC+™ Model One of the most legendary amps in the Mesa/Boogie line, the John Petrucci’s favorite on which he based his custom amplifier. The same amplifier chosen for one of the greatest metal records of all time. When it comes to classic high gain tones, the Mark IIC+ goes all in with its percussive characteristics and its sound tweak ability thanks to its build in equalizer.. Controls: • • • • • • • • • • • • • 363 VOLUME: sets the gain of the clean channel. Push it closer to 10 for an edgy sound that starts to crunch. PULL BRIGHT: boosts the brilliance of the preamp, especially when the Volume control is kept low. TREBLE: sets the amount of high frequencies on the sound. TREBLE PULL SHIFT: modifies the frequencies where the treble control works. BASS: sets the amount of low frequencies on the sound. BASS PULL SHIFT: modifies the frequencies where the bass control works. MIDDLE: sets the amount of mid frequencies on the sound. MASTER 1: determines the level that is sent to the power amp for the clean channel. Turning this knob up pushes the power amp to saturate and produce great crunch sounds. MASTER 1 PULL DEEP: when enabled the bass response of the amplifier is extended. LEAD DRIVE: sets the gain of the lead channel. LEAD DRIVE PUSH LEAD: enables the lead channel. LEAD MASTER: determines the level that is sent to the power amp for the lead channel. Turning this knob up pushes the power amp to saturate and produce bold sounds. EQ BANDS: these sliders can control the equalization of the amp on 5 distinct frequencies areas. You’ll find it extremely musical and a powerful sound sculpting tool. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • EQ AUTO: automatic enables the graphic EQ when the amp is switched to the lead channel. • EQ IN: enables the graphic EQ on both channels. • BACK: access to the rear panel controls. Rear Panel controls: • • • • 364 PRESENCE (back): this control sets up the basic brightness of the overall tone. REVERB (back): controls the amount of reverb coming from the internal spring unit. SIMUL CLASS/CLASS A (back): switch between the two power amp modes: simul Class and Class A. FRONT (back): access to the front panel controls. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Mark V Officially Certified MESA/Boogie® Mark V™ Model The Mark V is more the one amplifier, it’s nine amplifiers in one. The groundbreaking Mark I™, Mark II™, Mark IIC+, Mark III and Mark IV and more are all available in this unique model recreating the full history of Mesa/ Boogie company. Its versatility goes even further with a tube selector to switch between 6L6s and EL34, Diode/ Tube and Pentode/Triode rear switches that really lets you explore the full history of distorted guitar tones. Common controls for all channels: • • • • • • • • GAIN: sets the gain of the channel. MASTER: determines the level that is sent to the power amp for the channel. PRESENCE: this control sets up the basic brightness of the overall tone. TREBLE: sets the amount of high frequencies on the sound. MID: sets the amount of mid frequencies on the sound. BASS: sets the amount of low frequencies on the sound. EQ ON/OFF: enables the EQ for the channel. WATT SELECTOR: selects the power for the channel among 10W, 45W and 90W. Other controls: • • • • 365 CLEAN/FAT/TWEED: choose among the Clean, Fat and Tweed preamp modes of channel 1. EDGE/CRUNCH/MARK I: choose among the Edge, Crunch and Mark I preamp modes of channel 2. MK2C+/MK4/XTREME: choose among the Marck IIC+, Mark IV and Xtreme preamp modes of channel 3. SLIDERS/PRESET: choose if the equalization is set using the EQ sliders or if it is a fixed Vcurved style EQ. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop • • • • • • Gear Models This option is available for all three channels. Channel 1 is the switch on top, channel 2 is in the middle, channel 3 is at the bottom. EQ BANDS: these sliders can control the equalization of the amp on 5 distinct frequencies areas. You’ll find it extremely musical and a powerful sound sculpting tool. PRESET DEPTH: sets the depth for the preset v-curved eq independently for the three channels. Channel 1 is the knob on top, channel 2 is in the middle, channel 3 is at the bottom. OUTPUT: sets the master output of the amplifier. SOLO: sets the solo boost when the solo function is activated. FULL/VARIAC: it is possible to set the AC power between the full voltage and a reduced voltage power mode (variac) for a looser, more “elastic” feel. REAR: access the rear panel controls. Rear Panel controls: • CHANNEL SELECT (rear): the channel selector is also available in the rear panel for easy access when tweaking the rear controls. • SEND LEVEL (rear): sets the level sent to the loop FX. • REVERB CH1/CH2/CH3 (rear): sets the amount of reverb for each channel. • PENTODE/TRIODE (rear): sets the power amp mode for channel 3. • DIODE TUBE (rear): sets the power amp mode for channel 1 and 2 (only available for 45W). • SOLO (rear): activates the Solo function. • EL34/6L6 (rear): sets the power tubes type. • FRONT (rear): access to the front panel controls. 366 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models California Tweed Officially Certified MESA/Boogie® California Tweed™ Model The California Tweed has a simplistic design that raises the bar in the world of vintage tone. Its single channel simplicity with integrated reverb hides an all-tube golden tone. Its multi-watt switch lets you browse into a variety of power options from 2W to 40W to really take advantage of the tone possibilities of this amplifier.. Controls: • • • • • • • • 367 GAIN: sets the gain of the channel. TREBLE: sets the amount of high frequencies on the sound. MID: sets the amount of mid frequencies on the sound. BASS: sets the amount of low frequencies on the sound. PRESENCE: this control sets up the basic brightness of the overall tone. MASTER: determines the level that is sent to the power amp for the channel. REVERB: sets the amount of reverb. MULTI-WATT: selects the power for the amplifier among 2W, 10W, 20W, 30W and 40W. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Orange® OR-120 Officially Certified Orange® OR120™ Head Model An exciting new addition to the line, this model can really turn heads. You’ll hear the vintage hand-wired and very original sound of this killer British powerhouse from the first note. Controls: • • • • • 368 F.A.C.: 6-position switch that adjusts the midrange EQ. EQ Hz: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. EQ kHz: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. HF. DRIVE: presence control that boosts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. GAIN: adjusts the output level of the power amp from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Tiny Terror Officially Certified Orange® Tiny Terror™ Head Model The UK-manufactured point-to-point, all hand wired, Tiny Terror Hand Wired Edition offers a step up from the already legendary Tiny Terror. A wider frequency response gives this amp more bite and punch. The Orange Tiny Terror is a compact classic! Controls: • VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage from 1 to 10. • TONE: emphasizes bass frequencies when turned to the left and high frequencies when turned to right. This is amp’s EQ stage. • GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage from 1 to 10. • OUTPUT: switches the power amp output between 15W and 7W. 369 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Rockerverb 50 Officially Certified Orange® RockerVerb 50 MKII™ Head Model Rockerverb is, to say the least, “dirty”, but it is by no means a one trick pony. Start at full gain and and then pull back to experience a variety of classic Orange tones. Whether you’re looking for metal, fusion, blues, rock or even country, the Rockerverb delivers! Controls: • • • • • • 370 REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound from 1 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AD 30 Officially Certified Orange® AD-30TC™ Combo Model With a tight, springy and fast character, the AD 30 has its own original vintage sound. The AD 30 is the best candidate to be the new world standard for 30-watt Class A valve amplifiers. Controls: • • • • • 371 GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage from 1 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage from 1 to 10. MASTER: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Thunderverb 200 Officially Certified Orange® Thunderverb™ 200 Head Model This powerful amplifier sports two clean/crunch lead channels, each with three stages of gain. Channel A has the same 3-band EQ as the lead channel used on the Rockerverb series. Channel B has a new shape control that scoops the mids and increases the bass and treble when turned up. Use this scoop knob to dial in everything from vintage rock to modern blues, hard rock to metal. Nothing can match the bone crushing, bottom-end punch of this big stage tone head. Even when used quietly, you know you are in command of some serious power! The Thunderverb 200 is the new standard for versatility in a guitar amplifier. The Extended Tonal Range enables this revolutionary amplifier to also be used as a bass head. Global Controls: • ATTENUATOR: attenuates the general output level. This control allows to make use of the power amp distortion. Attenuate the general output, then increase the volume to saturate the power amp stage. • REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound, from 1 to 10. Controls for Channel A: • • • • • 372 VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the preamp stage, from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. MIDDLE: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Controls for Channel B: • VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the preamp stage, from 1 to 10. • SHAPE: scoops the mids and increases the bass and high when turned up. • GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 1 to 10. 373 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AD 200 Officially Certified Orange® AD200B MK 3™ Head Model The AD 200 is quite simply one of the purest bass tube amplifiers ever produced. No bells and whistles, just the shortest signal path from your guitar to your speaker. Vintage-inspired, but full of modern tones, the AD200B has a creamy, dynamic low-end with a focused midrange crunch. Simple to use, this amp has only full EQ, master volume, and gain controls. Controls: • • • • • 374 VOLUME: adjusts the overall output level of the power amp stage, from 0 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 0 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Dual Terror Officially Certified Orange® Dual Terror™ Head Model Twin channel 30 watt guitar head. Featuring a unique two stage preamp which has a massive tonal range using just three controls per channel. The Fat Channel delivers warmer tones whilst the Tiny Terror Channel has the sonic character of the original Tiny Terror. Global Controls: • FAT/TINY TEERROR: selects the FAT Channel or the TINY TERROR Channel. • OUTPUT: switches the power amp output between 15W (HALF) and 30W (FULL). Controls for each of the two channels: • VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage from 0 to 10. • TONE: emphasizes bass frequencies when turned to the left and high frequencies when turned to right, from 0 to 10. This is amp’s EQ stage. • GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage from 1 to 10. 375 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models OR 50 Officially Certified Orange® OR50H™ Head Model In 1972 Orange launched an amp which came to define the Orange sound; years later it was dubbed the ‘Pics Only’ due the use of pictures and the absence of any text. Although not a reissue, the OR50H owes more than a nod to this vintage legend in its cosmetics, tone and even the construction techniques adopted.Featuring a traditional single channel with a three stage gain section, the real weapon in the OR50′s arsenal is the HF Drive control. This is two controls in one! As you turn the control clockwise you will hear the power amp presence increase whilst adding an extra dimension of power amp gain.This is truly one of the most versatile single channel amps ever created. Controls: • HF DRIVE: increase the power amp presence whilst adding an extra dimension of power amp gain, from 0 to 10. • VOLUME: adjusts the overall output level of the power amp stage, from 0 to 10. • TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. • MID: boosts and cuts the mid frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. • BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 0 to 10. • GAIN: adjusts the input gain of the preamp stage. Use this setting to drive the preamp stage, from 0 to 10. 376 Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models THD® THD Bi-Valve Officially Certified THD® BiValve™ Head Model This is a model of the THD® BiValve™. This modern boutique amplifier has become very popular on the stage and in the studio. Using a single ended class A design, it is capable of wide expanse of tone. From the clean to the crunchy to the heavily saturated, the THD BiValve can create all these tones with ease. Controls: • • • • • 377 BASS: boosts and cuts the bass frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. TREBLE: boosts and cuts the high frequencies of the amp’s EQ stage, from 1 to 10. PRESENCE: boost the high frequencies of the EQ stage, from 1 to 10. SPRING REVERB: sets the level of spring reverb added to the guitar amp sound, from 1 to 10. VOLUME: adjusts the output level of the power amp stage, from 1 to 10. Amplifiers AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Cabinets AmpliTube Guitar 10" 4x10 Open Vintage Based on Fender® SuperReverb® 4x10 1967 378 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube Guitar 1x12" 1x12 Combo Based on Marshall® 1x12 Valvestate™ 12 379 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 1x12 MB II Based on MESA/Boogie® Mark II™ 1x12 EV 380 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 1x12 MB III Based on MESA/Boogie® Mark III™ 1x12 EV 381 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 1x12 Open Modern Based on VHT® Pitbull™ 1x12 Combo 382 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 1x12 Open Vintage Based on Fender® Deluxe® 65 1x12 383 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube Guitar 2x12" 2x12 Closed Vintage Based on Marshall® 1922 2x12 Greenbacks 384 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 2x12 Gry British Vint Based on Vox® AC30™ 2x12" ‘60s Graybacks 385 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 2x12 JP Jazz Based on Roland® JC-120™ 2x12 386 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 2x12 Open Vintage Based on Vox® AC30™ Top Boost equipped with Jensen® Blue Back 2x12 387 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube Guitar 4x10” 4x10 NY410 Based on Aguilar® DB410 This 4x10 cabinet can handle dense mixes like a breeze with its ability to cut through big guitar sounds, but still maintaining its full-range tone. It’s the perfect match for the New York B750, and together they create a perfect bass rig for any situation. It also features an adjustable HF driver. 388 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube Guitar 4x12” 4x12 Brit 30 Based on Marshall® 1960A Lead Vintage 4x12" Slanted, V30 389 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x12 Brit 8000 Based on Marshall® 1960 Lead Vintage 4x12" Slanted, G12-80 390 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x12 Brit 9000 Based on Marshall® 1960A Lead Vintage 4x12" Slanted, T75 391 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x12 Brit Silver Based on Marshall® 2551A 4x12" Slanted, T75 392 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x12 Closed Modern Based on Marshall® 4x12 ‘80s 1982A 393 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x12 Closed Vintage Based on Marshall® 4x12 Angled, ‘70s Greenbacks 394 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x12 HiAmp Based on Hiwatt® 4x12 395 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x12 Metal F Based on Fender® 4x12 MH™ 396 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x12 Metal T Based on MESA/Boogie® 4x12" Rectifier® 397 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x12 Metal V Based on Peavey® 5150™ 4x12 398 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x12 Modern M Based on Marshall® JCM800™ 4x12 399 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x12 Red Pig Based on Marshall® Major 4x12" Slanted, T75 400 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x12 Vintage M Based on Marshall® 1960 4x12 401 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube Bass 4x10+tw Bass Based on SWR® Goliath™ 4x10 402 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x10+tw TE Bass Based on Trace Elliot® 4x10 403 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 1x15 Bass Vintage Based on Ampeg® B15R™ 1x15 404 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 1x18 Horn Bass Based on Acoustic® 301™ Folded Horn 1x18 405 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Custom IR The Custom IR cabinet lets you load any Impulse Response into AmpliTube 5 with some powerful tools to shape its sound even more. To import a new IR into the list just click the + button and select it from your hard drive. To delete an IR from the list select it and click the trash icon. Controls: • HPF: this is a High Pass Filter to roll off the low end of your impulse. • TILT: by turning this knob clockwise you remove low frequencies and add high frequencies. Turned counterclockwise it removes high frequencies and adds low frequencies. • LPF: this is a Low Pass Filter to roll off the high end of your impulse. • SIZE: • VOL: turns up or down the amplitude of the impulse. • POLARITY: reverses the polarity of the impulse. • DELAY: delays the IR signal from 0 to 25ms. 406 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube SVX 1x15 SVX-15R Based on Ampeg® B-15R Portaflex Flip Top 1x15" Model with adjustable HF driver 407 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 2x10 SVX-500 Based on Ampeg® BA-500 2x10" Model with adjustable HF driver 408 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 2x12 SVX-212 Based on Ampeg® PB-212H 2x12" Model with adjustable HF driver 409 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x10 SVX-410B Based on Ampeg® BXT-410H 4x10" Model with adjustable HF driver 410 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x10 SVX-410S Based on Ampeg® SVT-410H 4x10" Model with adjustable HF driver 411 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 8x10 SVX-810E Based on Ampeg® SVT-810E 8x10" Cab Model 412 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 1x15 SVX-115 Based on Ampeg® HERITAGE B-15N® 1x15” Cab Model 413 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 2x12 SVX-212 AV Based on Ampeg® SVT-212 AV® 2x12” Cab Model 414 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 8x10 SVX-810A Based on Ampeg® SVT-810 AV 8x10” Cab Model 415 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Brian May 1x6 BM DK Based on the cab section of the Deacy 416 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 2x12 BM 30 Blue Based on the cab section of VOX® AC30TM setup equipped with Celestion Alnico Blue speakers. 417 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 2x12 BM 30 H70 Triple cabinet based on the cab section of VOX® AC30TM equipped with Celestion G12H anniversary speakers. 418 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Carvin® 2x12 V3M Officially Certified Carvin® 212V 2x12 Cab Model 419 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Dimebag Darrell CFH Collection 2x12 JP Jazz CFH Based on Roland® JC-120™ 2x12 Cab Model 420 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x12 Darrell 412 Based on Randall® 412 JB 4x12 Cab Model 421 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Dr. Z Amplification® 1x12 MAZ 18 Jr. Officially Certified Dr. Z Amplification® MAZ 18 Jr.™ 1x12" Cabinet Model 422 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 2x12 Z Wreck Officially Certified Dr. Z Amplification® Z Wreck™ 2x12" Cabinet Model 423 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models ENGL® E 412 PRO XXL Officially Certified ENGL® 4x12" XXL PRO Straight E412XXLB Cabinet Model 424 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models E 412 Standard Officially Certified ENGL® 4x12" Standard Slanted E412SSB Cabinet Model 425 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Fender® 1x12 ’57 Deluxe Officially Certified ’57 Deluxe™ 1x12" Open Back Cabinet Model equipped with Jensen® P12Q speaker 426 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 1x10 Pro Junior Officially Certified Pro Junior™ 1x10" Open Back Cabinet Model equipped with Eminence® speaker 427 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 1x15 ’64 Vibroverb Custom Officially Certified ’64 Vibroverb™ 1x15" Open Back Cabinet Model equipped with Eminence® speaker 428 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 1x12 ’65 Deluxe Reverb Officially Certified ’65 Deluxe Reverb® 1x12" Open Back Cabinet Model equipped with Jensen® C12k speaker 429 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 2x12 ’65 Twin Reverb Officially Certified 65 Twin Reverb® 2x12" Open Back Cabinet Model equipped with Jensen® C12k speakers 430 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 1x12 Super-Sonic Officially Certified Super-Sonic™ 1x12" Open Back Cab Model equipped with Celestion® Vintage 30 speaker 431 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 3x10 Vibro-King Officially Certified Vibro-King® 3x10" Open Back Cabinet Model equipped with Jensen® P10R speakers 432 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x10 ’59 Bassman Officially Certified ’59 Bassman® 4x10 Open Back Cabinet Model equipped with Jensen® P10R speakers 433 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 8x10 Bass 810 PRO Officially Certified 810 Pro 8x10" Front-Ported Cab Model equipped with Eminence® speaker 434 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 1x6 Champion 600 Officially Certified Champion™ 600 1x6" Open Back Cab Model with Fender® Spec. Design speaker 435 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x12 MH-412SL Officially Certified MH-412SL 4x12" Closed Back Cab Model equipped with Celestion® G12T-100 speakers 436 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Vibratone Officially Certified Vibratone 1x10" Rotary Speaker Cabinet Model 437 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 1x10 ’65 Princeton Officially Certified Fender® ‘65 Princeton® 1x10" Open Back Cabinet Model 438 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 1x8 ’57 Champ Officially Certified Fender® ’57 Champ 1x8" Open Back Cabinet Model 439 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 1x8 ’57 Custom Champ Officially Certified Fender® ’57 Custom Champ® 1X8" Cabinet Model 440 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 1x12 ’57 Custom Deluxe Officially Certified Fender® ’57 Custom Deluxe™ 1x12" Cabinet Model 441 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 2x12 ’57 Custom Twin-Amp Officially Certified Fender® ’57 Custom Twin-Amp™ 2x12" Cabinet Model 442 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 1x15 ’57 Custom Pro-Amp Officially Certified Fender® ’57 Custom Pro-Amp 1x15" Cabinet Model 443 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 3x10 ’57 Bandmaster Officially Certified Fender® ’57 Bandmaster™ 3x10" Cabinet Model 444 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x10 ’65 Super Reverb Officially Certified Fender® ’65 Super Reverb® 4x10" Cabinet Model 445 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 1x15 ’53 Bassman Officially Certified Fender® ’53 Bassman® 1x15" Cabinet Model 446 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Gallien-Krueger® 1x12 MB 150 S Officially Certified Gallien-Krueger® MB150S™ 1x12 Cabinet Model 447 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Jimi Hendrix 2x12 Open SL Based on Sears® Silvertone® 2x12 448 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 2x12 Open T J120 Based on Fender® Twin 2x12 equipped with J.B. Lansing® D120F 449 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 2x15 Closed B J130 Based on Fender® Bassman® 2 x15", JBL® D130F 450 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 2x15 Closed D J130 Based on Fender® Dual Showman® 2x15", JBL® D130F 451 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x12 Closed 25 C Based on Marshall® 4x12" equipped with 25W Celestion™ 452 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x12 Closed 75 C Based on Marshall® 4x12" equipped with 75W Celestion™ 453 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x12 Closed J120 Based on Marshall® 4x12" equipped with J.B.Lansing® D120F 454 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Joe Satriani 4x12 Satch 60 Based on Marshall® 1960B equipped with 4 x12 G12T-75 Celestion™ 455 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x12 Satch Green Based on Marshall® 4 x12 equipped with 20W greenbacks Celestion™ 456 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Boston Cab Sim Based on the cabinet emulation section of the Rockman X100. 457 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Leslie® When a Leslie® cabinet is loaded you can access to the deeper settings clicking on the Tech View button The tech view is divided in three sections. The first section has the setup settings:: • MIC SETUP: changing the way you mic the Leslie cabinet affects the perception of the rotation or “doppler effect.” You can choose between a 90° mic position, which is the most common, giving a non-symmetric perception of the rotation, to the 180° mic position, which is less common, but sometimes preferable when a more symmetrical left and right modulation is what is needed. The overall timbre and sonic character also changes between the 90° and 180° because of the different microphones position that were used when recording the originals. This provides even more versatility. • MIC DISTANCE: sets how far from the cabinet you want the mics to be placed. • SLOW/FAST SPEED: sets the rotation speed of the horn and the drum. • ACCELERATION/DECELERATION: sets the amount of time that is necessary to go from fast rotation to slow and vice-versa. The second section has a 3-band eq with parametric midrange to let you further shape the sound. The third section has the dedicated mixer. Here you have full mix control of the four microphone channels used when capturing the Leslie speakers. Each channel has its own level and pan control so that you can set the Leslie mix as you prefer. You can, for example, set the drum using just one channel panned centered to have 458 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models solid monaural low frequencies and use the horn in stereo, or you can get the immediate ’70s sonic flavor by using just one mic on the top and one on the bottom panned just a bit apart. Note that the controls for Fast, Slow and Brake are always accessible at the bottom left of the 3D Cabinet View. 459 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 122 Officially Certified Leslie® 122 Cabinet Model 460 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 122A Officially Certified Leslie® 122A Cabinet Model 461 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 147 Officially Certified Leslie® 147 Cabinet Model 462 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Leslie 3300W Officially Certified Leslie® 3300w Cabinet Model 463 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models G37 Officially Certified Leslie® G37 Cabinet Model This cab differs from the Studio 12 in the lower frequencies as it is equipped with a vintage-voiced V30 12” speaker suited to guitar. 464 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Studio 12 Officially Certified Leslie® Studio 12 Cabinet Model This cab differs from the G37 in the lower frequencies as it is equipped with a 12” Eminence bass speaker tailored to the wider low frequency range of organs. 465 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Marshall® - Slash 4x12 1960AV SL Officially Certified Slash-Marshall® 1960AV Cabinet Model 466 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x12 1960BV SL Officially Certified Slash-Marshall® 1960BV Cabinet Model 467 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models MESA/Boogie® 1x12 Mark III Officially Certified MESA/Boogie® Mark III™ Combo Cabinet Model 468 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 1x12 Mark IV Officially Certified MESA/Boogie® Mark IV™ Combo Cabinet Model 469 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 1x12 California Tweed Officially Certified MESA/Boogie® 1x12 California Tweed™ Cabinet Model Based on the cabinet section of the California Tweed combo this cabinet is loaded with American J40 speakers. 470 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 2x12 California Tweed Officially Certified MESA/Boogie® 2x12 California Tweed™ Cabinet Model Based on the cabinet section of the California Tweed combo this cabinet is loaded with American J100 speakers. 471 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 2x12 Road King Officially Certified MESA/Boogie® 2x12 Road King™ Cabinet Model The 2x12 Road King cabinet is loaded with 2 EV Darkness speakers designed specifically for Mesa/Boogie. 472 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 2x12 Rectifier Horizontal Officially Certified MESA/Boogie® 2x12 Recto® Horizontal Closed Cabinet Model 473 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 2x12 TransAtlantic TA-30 Officially Certified MESA/Boogie® TransAtlantic® TA-30 Combo Cabinet Model 474 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x12 Recto Traditional Slant Officially Certified MESA/Boogie® 4x12 Recto® Traditional Slant Closed Cabinet Model 475 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x12 Road King Vintage Officially Certified MESA/Boogie® 4x12 Road King™ Slanted cabinet model. The 4x12 Road King Vintage is based on the Road King slanted cabinet and is loaded with 4 Brit V1 with a great mid-range response. 476 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x12 Road King Black Officially Certified MESA/Boogie® 4x12 Road King™ Slanted cabinet model. The 4x12 Road King Black is based on the Road King slanted cabinet and is loaded with 4 EV Darkness designed specifically for Mesa/Boogie. 477 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Orange® 1x12 PPC 112 Officially Certified Orange® PPC 112 1x12" Cabinet Model 478 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 1x12 Tiny Terror Officially Certified Orange® 1x12" Tiny Terror™ Combo Cabinet Model 479 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 1x15 OBC 115 Officially Certified Orange® OBC 115™ 1x15" Cabinet Model 480 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 2x12 AD 30 Officially Certified Orange® AD-30TC™ 2x12" Combo Cabinet Model 481 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 2x12 PPC 212 Officially Certified Orange® PPC 212 2x12" Closed Back Cabinet Model 482 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 2x12 PPC OB Officially Certified Orange® PPC 212 2x12" Open Back Cabinet Model 483 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x10 OBC 410 Officially Certified Orange® OBC 410™ 4x10" Cabinet Model 484 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 4x12 PPC 412 Officially Certified Orange® PPC 412 4x12" Cabinet Model 485 Cabinets AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models 8x10 OBC 810 Officially Certified Orange® OBC 810™ 8x10" Cabinet Model 486 Cabinets AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models Microphones Dynamic Dynamic 57 Based on Shure® SM57™ This mic model is based on one of the most popular small diaphragm dynamic microphones. Its bright, edgy sound has made it a widely used guitar amp mic. Typically used in studios paired with a smoother and warmer condenser mic. 487 Microphones AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models Dynamic 20 Based on Electro-Voice® RE20™ This mic model recreates a smooth reaction across a wide spectrum of frequencies, especially attractive in the low area. This means that the Dynamic 20 is a great selection for acoustic and electric bass. 488 Microphones AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models Vintage Dynamic 20 Based on AKG® D20™ This model is a vintage dynamic large diaphragm microphone that used to be the standard mic for bass amps and kick drums during the ‘60s. It’s warm and present, and has a smooth roll-off at high frequencies. It has a very pleasant mid range presence together with a smooth high frequencies rolloff that delivers a nice vintage sheen to the tone. 489 Microphones AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models Dynamic 421 Based on Sennheiser® MD421™ Probably the second most popular dynamic mic to use on guitar amps, this model provides an equally pleasing sound, but is warmer than the 57. It also adds a very focused boost on hi-mid frequencies that makes it suitable to get aggressive driven tones. 490 Microphones AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models Dynamic 441 Based on Sennheiser® MD441™ This model has a flatter frequency response than most other dynamic mics. This mic is highly regarded as a guitar mic and used widely in studios all over the world. 491 Microphones AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models Dynamic 609 Based on Sennheiser® MD609™ This is a model of a faithful and popular microphone used daily in many studios and can be found “hanging around” there or on stages everywhere. This dynamic microphone can deliver honest yet punchy sounds. Can result in very mid-rangey sounds at times, but this is sometimes what you want, especially when combined with a warmer condenser microphone. 492 Microphones AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models Condenser Bottle 563 Based on Neumann® CMV-563™ This model is based on one of the most legendary vintage tube condenser microphones. Its bright frequency response and gentle compression make this microphone a mandatory tool in your guitar rig. 493 Microphones AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models Condenser 12 Based on AKG® C12™ This mic model is based on one of the first legendary tube microphones in the history of recording. Extremely detailed high frequencies can sometimes emphasize some speakers’ fizziness especially when placed on axis, so it is typically used slightly off. 494 Microphones AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models Condenser 67 Based on Neumann® U67™ This mic model is based on one of the most famous multi-purpose studio microphones. 495 Microphones AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models Condenser 84 Based on Neumann® KM84™ No microphone collection would be complete without a great small diaphragm condenser mic. This model is based on the standard for small diaphragm mics. As with any good small condenser mic, the 84 provides a clean clear picture of the guitar tone. 496 Microphones AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models Condenser 87 Based on Neumann® U-87™ This is a model of one of the most popular large diaphragm mics ever. It can be found in any large recording studio mic locker. Because of its excellent frequency response curve, the 87 has become the go-to mic when needing a clean, flattering sound. 497 Microphones AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models Condenser 170 Based on Neumann® TLM 170™ This is a model of a high-quality large-diaphragm condenser microphone used in famous studios around the world. One of the first with transformerless technology, this microphone came into the world boasting a very high-quality sound with low noise and a very impressive dynamic range. This microphone will not color the sound of the speaker, or at least will color it very little. That’s why it is a great choice to hear a very natural rendering of the speaker sound even when used alone. 498 Microphones AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models Condenser 414 Based on AKG® C-414 ULS™ The Condenser 414 is modeled after another highly regarded large diaphragm condenser microphone. It is a flat and clean/open microphone that will flatter big full tones and will also blend beautifully when combined with another cabinet/mic setup. 499 Microphones AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models MD1-b Based on Groove Tubes® MD1b-FET This is a modern-sounding large diaphragm condenser microphone based on the Groove Tubes® MD1b-FET. With a subtle boost in the highs and a smooth low end, this is an excellent choice for capturing brighter, more modern guitar tones. 500 Microphones AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models Tube VM Based on Brauner® VM1™ The Tube VM condenser microphone provides an extremely natural, contemporary sound with extreme detail and clarity. The Tube VM sound is transparent and open, and this makes it the go-to mic for many artists and engineers around the globe. 501 Microphones AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models Ribbon Ribbon 121 Based on Royer® R121™ Use this ribbon microphone to capture a pure, natural sound. This is modeled after one of the must-have studio ribbon microphones of our time. Incredibly present mid range with a natural and smooth roll off on the high frequencies, makes it ideal when you’re hearing too much “fizz” from the in axis tone on high gain and metal tones, switching to this mic will reduce the unwanted high frequencies fizzness in a way that will not reduce presence at all. 502 Microphones AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models Ribbon 160 Based on Beyerdynamic® M160™ This mic is modeled after a double-ribbon hypercardioid microphone, one of the top choices for capturing the sound of a broad diversity of sources. Very detailed and with a focus on mid range, try this when you want more mid range presence without applying EQ or changing amp settings. 503 Microphones AmpliTube Custom Shop Gear Models Velo-8 Based on Groove Tubes® VELO-8™ This is a double-ribbon figure-8 microphone with a unique Neodymium element. With a silky-smooth high end and good low end body, a great choice for more vintage-sounding guitar tones, this mic mixes very well with other microphones for very full-bodied recordings. 504 Microphones AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Rack Effects AmpliTube Delay & Reverb Digital Delay This advanced delay modeled effect can add a variety of depth to the sound, by providing five different delay modes. The delay can also be synched to the host tempo providing even more flexibility. Controls: MODE: sets the output mode of the Delay effect; Stereo, Left/Right, Mono, Left/Center/Right, and Doubler. DELAY TIME: sets the time between the echoes, from 1 ms to 2000 ms. BPM SYNC: allows the effect to synchronize to the project tempo and changes the Rate control to beat values. FEEDBACK: changes the amount of time that the delay repeats, from 0% to 100%. FILTER: sets the low pass filter for the delay effect, from 200 Hz to 20 kHz. When set to mid values it gives a nice warmth to the delay timbre. • MIX: adjusts the amount of wet sound with the dry sound, from 0% to 100%. • OUT LEVEL: sets the output level of the effect, from -15 dB to +15 dB. • • • • • 505 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Digital Reverb This digital reverb is capable of adding small amount of space to a signal or creating a huge hall around the instrument. Controls: • • • • • 506 DECAY TIME: sets the length of the reverb, from 0.60 seconds to 14.00 seconds. DENSITY: sets the number of reflections generated by the reverb, from 0 to 99. COLOUR: sets the reverb coloration from dark to light, from 2 kHz to 20 kHz. MIX: adjusts the amount of wet sound with the dry sound, from 0% to 100%. OUT LEVEL: sets the output level of the effect, from -15 dB to +15 dB. Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Hall Reverb This effect is perfect to put your sound into a large hall to generate a realisitic long reverb and add natural sounding tales to your tone. 507 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Inverse Reverb A reverse reverb applies an envelope (slow attack, fast decay) to the early reflections. The main parameter that affects the sound of this reverb is time. Time can be adjusted for the buildup and cut off of the early reflections. This affects the sound as if it were being reversed in the reverberation, but in actuality it is simply an envelope effect. 508 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Plate Reverb This processor replicates the effect of a reverb generated by a mechanical plate. A staple tool on pop music productions since the late fifties. 509 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Room Reverb This effect is perfect to put your sound into a natural sounding room. Perfect to create a 3D feeling and get a more realistic tone. 510 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Shimmer Reverb This effect is perfect to create long pitch shifting reverb pads. Great for cinematic sounds to send your tone into space. 511 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Tap Delay This creative delay effect unit can be used to create interesting and unusual delay effects thanks to the 8 totally independent taps. You can create grooving rhythm patterns by combining more taps with a specific time signature, and you can mix this up with psychedelic reverse tape effects you are able to set for each tap. The TapDelay is actually 8 delays in one single unit, and it allows you to set time, timbre and level for each one of these units. In addition, you can globally control with single knobs parameters for all the 8 taps at the same time, like time, dry/wet mix and feedback amount. Controls: • TIME: globally shifts the delay time of all the 8 taps. This is a relative control that works in this way: • When set at the center position (1x) it does not alter the time that has been setup on each tap. • When set to minimum (0.25x) it divides all times by four. • When set to max (4x) it multiply all times by four. Use it to globally change the delay tempo without changing the relations between all taps. • MIX: globally adjust the effect mix between the Dry signal and all the 8 delay taps. • FEEDBACK: globally adjust the amount of feedback the delay will have. When set at maximum, the delay with be sustaining itself. • TAP: use these buttons to select which one among the 8 delay taps you’re going to edit with next controls. • LEVEL: sets the audio level for the selected delay tap. 512 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • TIME: sets the delay time for the selected tap. It can be shown in milliseconds or in musical divisions, depending on the BPM Sync switch position. • TAPS DISPLAY: shows each Tap as a vertical bar. The horizontal position of the bar represent the delay time, the height of the bar represent the audio level. • FILTER: sets the timbre for the selected delay tap, darker at minimum and brighter at maximum. • REVERSE: enable this button to transform the selected delay tap from normal to reverse. When set to reverse a delay tap will sound like a reversed tape loop. • LINK: enable this button to make a change you do on the above mentioned parameters to apply to all the 8 taps at the same time. • BPM SYNC: allows the effect to synchronize to the project tempo. 513 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube EQ & Dynamics Black 76 The Black 76 Limiting Amplifier is modeled after what is probably the most used, most known, most wanted, and most universally recognized compressor/limiter in the audio industry. There are probably no professionally created records without tracks using this unit. This FET-based compressor is a true legend and a piece of history with a unique sound largely thanks to its input transformer and class A output stage. 514 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models EQ 81 The EQ 81 delivers that legendary British warmth and tone with a few twists. The key here is in the versatility of the EQ section sporting four independent bands rounded out by high and low pass filters. This effect is particularly useful when a more precise intervention on a track is needed, still maintaining tone and organic, analog warmth in the signal path. 515 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models EQ PG Originally designed as a variation to the standard 3- and 4-band console EQs, it uses an all-discrete signal path and proportional Q design with a ten-band graphic approach instead of the semi-parametric 3- and 4-band design of other modules. 516 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Graphic EQ IK Multimedia proprietary 31 band Graphic EQ. 20, 25, 31.5, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1k, 1.25k, 1.6k, 2k, 2.5k, 3.15k, 4k, 5k, 6.3k, 8k, 10k, 12.5k, 16k, 20k. Each band has +/- 15 dB boost, plus Reset button (total reset of all bands at 0 dB), and Level slider (+/- 15 dB). 517 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Model 670 Based on the Fairchild™ 670. Many top producers and engineers refer to the Fairchild™ 670 as the “Holy Grail of compressors” because it imparts a sound that adds something special to any kind of track, and our emulation captures that same sonic magic. 518 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Parametric EQ An equalizer with separate bands where you can dial in not only the frequency to boost or cut, but also the width of the bell shape. 519 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Parametric EQ 3 With its three totally independent EQs, this parametric EQ provides enough power to sculpt the perfect guitar tone or surgically enhance and alter any signal sent through it. 520 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Tube Compressor This compressor was modeled after a classic tube compressor. It is a very versatile, smooth compressor, and can add great color to the signal. Controls: • DRIVE: controls the amount of signal that is input into the effect, setting the compression level. • ATTACK: controls the amount of time that the compressor takes to react to the audio signal. • RELEASE: controls the amount of time that the compressor takes to return to normal gain after some compression has occurred. • RATIO: controls the strength of the compression. Higher values will result in a more evident effect. • OUT LEVEL: sets the output level of the effect, from -15 dB to +15 dB. 521 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Vintage EQ-1A Based on the Pultec® EQP-1A In virtually every major studio, you’re likely to see a distinctive blue unit with big black knobs — the Pultec® EQP-1A program EQ. The Vintage Tube Program Equalizer is based on it. Our painstakingly produced model gives all the functionality of the original unit and uncannily accurate sonic reproduction. 522 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models White 2A The White 2A Leveling Amplifier is based on a legendary vintage unit that is entirely tube-based. It’s a totally different device in terms of construction, where all the compression magic happens inside an optically coupled element formed by a fluorescent panel and some photocells: the famed T4A element. There is no electronic circuitry involved with the compression itself. It’s just a tube amp with photo-resistors, lighted by a fluorescent panel driven by the output signal. At the time of this invention, there were not many ways of making an audio compressor: only variable-mu and optical. Optical was the simplest one, and if proper elements for both the light emitting panel and the photocells were matched, magic happened. 523 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube Filter Filter C This effect models the sound of the famous Curtis® CEM3320 filter chip (found in the Prophet-5 and Oberheim OB-Xa synthesizers). 524 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Filter M This effect models the sound of the legendary Moog® transistor ladder filter (found in the Minimoog and Modular Moog). 525 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Filter O This effect models the sound of the iconic Oberheim® state variable filter (found in the Oberheim SEM). 526 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Filter R This effect models the sound of the famous Roland® IR3109 filter chip (found in the Juno-60 and Jupiter-8). 527 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Filter Formant This effect generates the resonances of the human vocal tract for vocal-like timbres. 528 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Filter Phaser This effect is a variable all-pass filter in the style of classic phase shifter stomp boxes and rack units. 529 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Rezo This rack model is a unique effect that can add synth-like drones and sustaining resonances to your parts. Make your guitar sound like a sitar or like a synth-drone to create sonic resonances to sing on and control the notes with your controller to create arpeggios and steps while playing. You have 4 resonating voices that can be tuned independently from note E0 to note B7, in half tone steps. For example, if you want to create a resonating C Major chord, just set the first three voices to C3, E3 and G3. By moving the All slider you can shift the recently created Chord without changing the intervals between the voices. You can set the desired voice note by note number of by frequency in Hz. • 1-4 SLIDERS: sets the pitch for each resonating voice. • 1-4 VALUE DISPLAY: displays which note each voice is tuned on. • NOTE/FREQUENCY SWITCH: turn on this switch to have the tuning of each voice displayed as a note. Turn this off to have the tuning of each voice to be displayed as frequency in Hz. • ALL: shifts all resonating notes by the same amount keeping relative intervals between voices identical. • RES: sets the amount of resonance for each voice, from min to max. When set to max the note will sustain by itself, when set to min the voice will not be resonating. • SCALE: the Rezonator is setup by default to span over a chromatic scale when you set the resonating voices, meaning that all half tones are possible. If you want to set another scale and want to remove notes 530 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models from the chromatic scale just open this menu and leave on only the notes you need. • FILTER: determines the brightness of the resonating voices, from dark (lower positions) to bright (upper positions). • MIX: sets the amount of resonating notes you want to hear. When the control is at min you’ll only hear the original sound, when fully up you’ll only hear the effected sound. • OUT: the resonating notes can become very loud use this control to adjust the overall output level of the Rezonator. 531 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Step Filter This is a powerful and deep beat sync filter effect. You will be able to apply Low/High and Band pass analog modeled filtering on freely customizable patterns to add groove and rhythmic pulsing to your parts. This will make your guitars and bass parts to sound like a rhythmic synth, if you want it. Controls: • CUTOFF: sets the center cutoff frequency of the filter. This is the cutoff frequency the filter will have when the steps are set to half position. • STEP BAR: click on the Steps to set each step level. You can also draw a curve while holding the mouse while dragging over multiple steps. • RES: sets the center resonance of the filter. This is the resonance amount the filter will have when the steps are set to half position. • DEPTH: sets how deep the filter is modulated by the steps. • HP/BP/LP: sets which kind of filter will be used: HP: high pass, BP: band pass, LP: low pass • 12/24: sets the steepness of the filter, 12 dB/oct will be softer, 24 dB/oct will be steeper. • DEST: sets what is modulated by the steps between filter Cutoff and/or filter Resonance. At full minimum position only Cutoff frequency is modulated, at max position only Resonance is modulated. • DIVISION: sets what time interval each step represent. • STEPS: sets the number of steps the cycle will consist of. • MODE: When set to Free the cycle will be continuous and will always cover all the steps that are specified in the Steps parameter. When set to Strike the cycle will re-start each time a chord or a note is played. 532 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • SWING: increase this control to give to the steps a swing type quantization. • BPM SYNC: allows the effect to synchronize to the project tempo. 533 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube Modulation AM Modulator This effect is designed to produce a tonal character totally different from the original when applied to a complex sound by using the carrier frequency to modulate the volume of the sound. 534 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Analog Chorus This classic analog stereo chorus model adds depth and space to the input signal. It can also be used as a vibrato effect. Controls: • CHORUS/VIBRATO: enables Vibrato or Chorus modes. Chorus mode is enabled when the corresponding LED is illuminated. • CHORUS: sets the intensity (or depth) of the Chorus effect, from 0 to 99. • VIB RATE: sets the rate of the Vibrato effect, from 0.02 Hz to 8 Hz. • VIB DEPTH: sets the intensity of the Vibrato effect, from 0 to 99. • STEREO/MONO: changes the rack effect from a stereo to a mono effect. Stereo is enabled when the corresponding LED is illuminated. • OUT LEVEL: sets the output level of the effect, from -15 dB to +15 dB. 535 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Auto Pan Auto Pan automatically moves the stereo location of the sound. 536 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Digital Chorus This modeled digital chorus effect creates a clear articulate chorus effect. Like the analog chorus, this effect adds depth and space to the input signal, but adds a different color to the overall signal. Controls: • WAVEFORM: selects the shape of the chorus effect, sine, triangle, or square wave. • RATE: sets the rate of the chorus effect, from 0.1 Hz to 8 Hz. • BPM SYNC: allows the effect to synchronize to the project tempo and changes the Rate control to beat values. • DEPTH: sets the intensity of the chorus, from 0 to 100. • STEREO/MONO: changes the rack effect from a stereo to a mono effect. Stereo is enabled when the corresponding LED is illuminated. • MIX: adjusts the amount of wet sound with the dry sound, from 0% to 100%. • OUT LEVEL: sets the output level of the effect, from -15 dB to +15 dB. 537 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Digital Flanger This model of a digital flanger can create a metallic modulated sound. Controls: • WAVEFORM: selects the shape of the flanger effect, sine, triangle, or square wave. • RATE: sets the rate of the Flanger effect, from 0.1 Hz to 8 Hz. • BPM SYNC: allows the effect to synchronize to the project tempo and changes the Rate control to beat values. • DEPTH: sets the intensity of the Flanger, from 0 to 100. • FEEDBACK: sets the nominal amount of signal that is returned to the input after processing effect, from 0 to 10. • STEREO/MONO: changes the rack effect from a stereo to a mono effect. Stereo is enabled when the corresponding LED is illuminated. • MIX: adjusts the amount of effected sound with the un-effected sound, from 0% to 100%. • OUT LEVEL: sets the output level of the effect, from -15 dB to +15 dB. 538 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models FM Modulator This effect is designed to produce a tonal character totally different from the original when applied to a complex sound by using the carrier frequency to modulate the pitch of the sound. It can replicate the sounds of some synthesis systems like FM or ring modulation. 539 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Rotary Speaker This effect is a model of a rotary speaker cabinet. Rotary speaker cabinets create a lush vibrato/chorus effect and add a tremendous amount of depth to the sound. Controls: • • • • • 540 SPEED: sets the speed of the rotary speaker effect, from .50 Hz to 7.80 Hz. DRIVE: sets the amount of overdrive in the rotary speaker effect, from 0% to 100%. BALANCE: changes the balance of high and low rotors in the signal, from 0 to 100. MIX: adjusts the amount of wet sound with the dry sound, from 0% to 100%. OUT LEVEL: sets the output level of the effect, from -15 dB to +15 dB. Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube Pitch Harmonator The Harmonator is an advanced harmonizing effect with three separate voices, each with independent harmony, level and pan. By entering the key and scale that the instrument is playing, the harmonator analyzes the input signal and track the three independent voices to the correct music key and scale (figure 10.17). Controls: • KEY: controls the key and type of scale that will be used by the harmonizer as a reference. If you’re playing a solo in E major set this to E Major, from C to B. • SCALE: changes the scale of the harmonizer, including Major, Dorian, Phrygian, Lydian, Mixolydian, Minor, and Locrian. • VOICE: controls the properties of each of the 3 voices of the harmonizer. • 1: selects voice 1 for editing. • 2: selects voice 2 for editing. • 3: selects voice 3 for editing. • INTERVAL: changes the interval of the selected voice, from low octave to up octave. • LEVEL: independently adjusts the level of each of the 3 voices, from 0 to 100. • PAN: independently adjusts the panning of each of the 3 voices, from 1.0L to 1.0R. 541 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • DRY PAN: adjusts the panning of the dry signal independently from the harmonized voices, from 1.0L to 1.0R. • MIX: blends the harmonized voice with the original voice, from 0% to 100%. 542 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Pitch Shifter This pitch shifting effect creates an independent harmony voice that can be blended with the original signal to create harmony lead parts and duet type guitar lines (figure 10.18). Controls: • SHIFT COARSE: sets the coarse tuning of the pitch shifter. Measured in intervals, from -24 to 24. • SHIFT FINE: sets the fine tuning of the pitch shifter. Measured in cents, from -50 to 50. • STEREO/SPLIT: sets the output of the effect to split the pitch shifted sound and the dry sound or blend them in a stereo layered fashion. • MIX: adjusts the amount of pitched shifted sound with the dry sound, from 0% to 100%. • OUT LEVEL: sets the output level of the effect, from -15 dB to +15 dB. 543 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models AmpliTube Other Saturator-X Thanks to its 10 operation modes, the Saturator-X is a very versatile and comprehensive module designed to produce the saturation colors of many different electronic components pushed over the edge, from subtle harmonic enhancement to all-out-nasty distortion. 544 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Step Slicer Add programmed rhythmic parts to your power chords and phrases with this powerful and creative beat synced slicing effect. It can be setup to create anything from the most amazing tremolos to the most complex rhythm effects that always stay in perfect sync with the beat. It contains two independent stepping engines, one for Level and one for Pan, so you can create independent patterns for level and panning within the same synched effect. Controls: • LEVEL: sets the amount of level modulation the steps will give. At min position the steps will not have effect, at maximum the steps range will be full. • STEP BAR: click on the Steps to set each step level. You can also draw a curve while holding the mouse while dragging over multiple steps. • RAMP: sets the steepness of the level change between steps. Set it at lower positions to get a more gatelike effect, or set it to higher positions to get a smoother effect. • DIVISION: sets what time interval each step represents. • STEPS: sets the number of steps the cycle will consist of. • VOLUME: select this to work on the Volume steps pattern. • PAN: select this to work on the Panning steps pattern. • MODE: When set to Free, the cycle will be continuous and will cover all the steps that are specified in the Steps parameter. When set to Strike, the cycle will re-start each time a chord or a note is played. 545 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • SWING: increase this control to give to the steps a swing type quantization. • BPM SYNC: allows the effect to synchronize to the project tempo. 546 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Stereo Enhancer The stereo enhancer model widens and narrows the stereo image. Controls: • STEREO IMAGE: changes the width of the stereo image. Normal width is in the middle of the slider. Moving the slider to the right widens the stereo image. Moving the slider to the left narrows the stereo image. Note: when processing a mono signal with this Rack, the control will result in being a reversed volume slider. 547 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Swell This is an “auto volume” swell processor that can automatically create fantastic swell effects while playing without any manual intervention. Use it subtly to add groove to your rhythm parts or use it with deeper settings to create dreaming pads or string-like sounds. Controls: • DEPTH: sets the depth of the volume swell, in dB. By default the depth is at max position, meaning that the volume will start from silence. By lowering this control you’ll make the effect to start the swell phase from a level which is higher than silence, up to min position that makes the effect to have no action. • SENS: this control sets the sensitivity for the Swell to recognize a new note or chord and therefore start a new Swell cycle. Set it higher if you want the Swell cycle to start even at the beginning of softer passages, or set it lower if you want the Swell cycle to only start for louder strikes. • TIME: sets the length of the Swell cycle. • SWELL: this LED goes On during the Swell phase. • OPEN: this LED goes On when the Swell phase has finished. • BPM SYNC: allows the effect to synchronize to the project tempo making the swell time to be specified in musical figures. 548 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Tape Cassette Tape Cassette is an effect that emulates the sound of vintage cassette tapes and decks. It adds little quirks and random fluctuations to your music for an extra analog feeling. 549 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Fender® Pitch Shift Based on Fender® Cyber-Twin® SE Pitch Shift A pitch-shifting effect with both pitch-shifting and detuning effects. Use for both wild soloing and unusual detuned textures. Controls: • • • • • • 550 Pitch Level: controls the Wet/Dry ratio from 1 to 10. Pitch: controls the amount of the pitch shift from 1 to 10. Detune: controls the detune amount from 1 to 10. Feedback: controls the feedback amount from 1 to 10. PreDelay: controls the Predelay amount from 1 to 10. Volume: controls the volume of the pitch effect from 1 to 10. Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Sine Flange Based on Fender® Cyber-Twin® SE Sine Flange A classic flange effect for swirling, psychedelic jams or intense metal rhythmic playing. Controls: • • • • • • • 551 Level: controls the amount of the flange effect from 1 to 10. Rate: controls the rate of the flange effect from 1 to 10. Depth: controls the depth of the flange effect from 1 to 10. Avg Delay: controls the delay amount of the flange effect from 1 to 10. Phase: controls the phase of the flange from 1 to 10. Volume: controls the volume of the flange effect from 1 to 10. BPM Sync: syncs the Flange effect to the master BPM of your DAW/Standalone metronome. Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Tape Echo Based on Fender® Cyber-Twin® SE Tape Echo A classic tape echo effect. Use for retro, lo-fi-style echo effects. Controls: • Time: controls the length of the echo effect from 30ms to 1450ms. When BPM Sync is turned on, time is displayed from a 1/32 to 1/1 ratio. • Feedback: controls the amount of repeats of the echo effect from 1 to 10. • Wow&Flutter: controls the amount of pitch drift/variation of the echo effect, to emulate tape playback from 1 to 10. • Brightness: controls the amount of high-end of the treble from 1 to 10. • Volume: controls the volume of the echo effect from 1 to 10. • Ramp/Step: alters the way that changes to echo time change from a “ramp up” style to a “stair step” style. • BPM Sync: syncs the Echo effect to the master BPM of your DAW/Standalone metronome. 552 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Triangle Chorus Based on Fender® Cyber-Twin® SE Triangle Chorus* A chorus/doubling effect for thickening up your guitar’s tone. Controls: • • • • • • • 553 Level: controls the amount of the chorus effect from 1 to 10. Rate: controls the rate of the chorus effect from 1 to 10. Depth: controls the depth of the chorus effect from 1 to 10. Avg Delay: controls the delay amount of the chorus effect from 1 to 10. Phase: controls the phase of the chorus from 1 to 10. Volume: controls the volume of the chorus effect from 1 to 10. BPM Sync: syncs the effect to the master BPM of your DAW/Standalone metronome. Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Wah Based on Fender® Cyber-Twin® SE Wah A classic-voiced wah effect with multiple settings to fit your playing style. Can add a funky, almost vocal vibe to your playing. Controls: • • • • • 554 Cryin’/Mccoy: switches between two different classic Wah styles. Wah: controls the amount of the wah effect from 1 to 10. Min Freq: controls the minimum frequency effected from 1 to 10. Max Freq: controls the maximum frequency effected from 1 to 10. Volume: controls the volume of the wah effect from 1 to 10. Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Compressor Based on Fender® Cyber-Twin® SE Compressor A classic compressor effect. Use to even out volume levels when playing for a studio-like tone, to add sustain to metal leads, or to accentuate the “twang” in country-style picking. Controls: • Ratio Buttons: sets the overall level of compression from “Low” to “Even Higher”. • Volume: controls the volume of the compressor effect from 1 to 10. 555 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Fender® ‘63 Reverb Officially Certified Fender® ‘63 Reverb Model The classic ‘63 Fender® Reverb Tank is now available in convenient rack form! This classic all-tube spring reverb unit is capable of producing an incredibly lush Reverb due to it’s unique 6v6 driven output. Revered as THE sound of reverb, you’ll hear this all tube driven signature Fender spring reverb on thousands of records from Surf to Soul, Country to Punk. Controls: • Dwell: controls how hard the signal hits the reverb tank from 1 to 10. The spring reverb is overdriven when Dwell is set to high values (from 7 to 10). This produces interesting and very characteristic tones. • Mixer: controls the mix of the original signal to the effected signal from 1 to 10. • Tone: shifts the tonal balance from low to high frequencies from 1 to 10. • Volume: controls the output level of the effect from 1 to 10. 556 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Fulltone® TERC - That 80’s Rack Chorus! Officially Certified Fulltone® TERC - That 80’s Rack Chorus!® The features and the general mood of the Fulltone TERC are based on the iconic Tri Stereo Chorus produced in the 80’s by “Dyno My Piano” brand. Controls: • EFFECT ON/OFF BUTTON: push button IN for EFFECT-ON, push to OUT for EFFECT OFF. • OUTPUTS STEREO / MONO BUTTON: there are 3 analog Chorus Circuits in a TERC: Left (L), Right (R), and Center (C). With this button pushed IN to STEREO, the L OUTPUT emits signal from the L & C Chorus circuits only, and the R OUTPUT emits signal from the R & C circuits only. With this button switched OUT (MONO mode) the L, R, and C Chorus circuits all sum evenly to both the L and R OUTPUTS. • PRESET MODE : this is the classic Tri-Stereo-Chorus slow chorus sound. PRESET mode only happens when the PRESET button is IN and the MANUAL button is OUT. You will notice that the INTENSITY knobs and the SPEED knob do not function when the PRESET is selected. NOTE: make sure MANUAL button is OUT or you will hear BOTH the PRESET and the MANUAL sounds at the same time! • MANUAL MODE : MANUAL mode happens when the PRESET button is OUT and MANUAL button is pressed IN. In MANUAL mode the L, R and C INTENSITY knobs and the SPEED knob are functional. NOTE: make sure PRESET button is OUT. 557 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models • Combining PRESET & MANUAL modes: yes, by pressing IN both PRESET and MANUAL mode buttons, you can combine all the different Low Frequency Oscillators (LFO’s) for all sorts of possibilities. It’s amazing to hear the PRESET mode’s slow swirl with a fast speed selected in the MANUAL mode on top of that. • INTENSITY knobs: the knobs ONLY function when the MANUAL knob is pressed IN. Turning these Clockwise (CW) will increase the chorus effect level, with the deepest chorus being around 12 o’clock to 1 o’clock. Chorus is created by taking the original signal, processing that signal through a delay and modulating (pitch bending) it, then mixing the original and the processed signals back together. The strongest chorus sounds you can get are when the original and processed signals are mixed together equally with a 50/50 balance, the “chorus” is created by these original and processed signals fighting against each other! Once you change the balance so that the processed signal gets louder than the original signal, you are only hearing the processed signal... which is what we call VIBRATO. Therefore, when any of the TERC’s INTENSITY knobs are past 1 o’clock your will be hearing mostly the pitch bend vibrato from those channels, something Michael Landau made famous during his “Raging Honkies” Band period. • SPEED knob: this knob only operates when the MANUAL mode button is pressed IN. Turn it CW to increase the rate of the modulation, turn it counter clockwise (CCW) to decrease the modulation rate. It has a ridiculously wide range of available speeds, and you can turn it (CCW) to a point where it is so slow the entire modulation cycle takes five seconds or more to complete. You will hear both Flange and Phase effects at lower speeds, especially with the INTENSITY knobs around 12 o’clock. 558 Rack Effects AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models Legal AmpliTube®, TONEX®, AI Machine Modeling™, ToneNET™, SVX™, X-GEAR™, X-DRIVE™, X-SPACE™, X-TIME™, X-VIBE™, VIR™, DIM™, DSM™, VRM™, are trademarks or registered trademark property of IK Multimedia Production Srl. All rights reserved. Marshall® and the Marshall logo are registered trademarks of Marshall Amplification Plc. used by permission. MESA/ Boogie® is a registered trademark property of MESA/Boogie Limited Corporation. FENDER™ and all FENDER amplifiers, logos, and trade dress are the trademarks of FMIC and used herein under license. All rights reserved. ORANGE® is a registered trademark of Orange Music Electronic Company Ltd. SEYMOUR DUNCAN® is a registered trademark of Carter Duncan Corporation. GROOVE TUBES® is a registered trademark of ROKR Ventures, Inc. GALLIENKRUEGER® is a registered trademark of Gallien-Krueger Corporation. JET CITY AMPLIFICATION 333® is a registered trademark property of 333 Enterprises Incorporated DBA Jet City Amplification Corporation. THD® is a registered trademark of THD Electronics Ltd. T-REX ENGINEERING® is a registered trademark of T-Rex Engineering ApS Corporation. CARVIN® is a registered trademark of Carvin Corporation. DR. Z AMPLIFICATION® is a registered trademark of Dr. Z Amps, Inc. FULLTONE® is a registered trademark of Fulltone Musical Products, Inc. Z-VEX® is a registered trademark of property of Zachary Vex. ENGL® is a registered trademark property of Edmund Engl. WAMPLER PEDALS® is a registered trademark property of Wampler Pedals, Inc. MORLEY® is a registered trademark property of Sound Enhancement Products, Inc. LESLIE® is a trademark property of Hammond Organ/Leslie, wholly-owned brand subsidiaries of Suzuki Musical Instruments Mfg., Ltd. of Hamamatsu, Japan, used under license. Jimi Hendrix™ name used under license of Authentic Hendrix, LLC. ©TM Authentic Hendrix, LLC. Dimebag Darrell™ name and likeness used under license of the Estate of Darrell Lance Abbott. Mac, the Mac logo, the Audio Units logo, iPhone®, iPod touch®, iPad® are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc. Windows and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. VST is a trademark of Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH. AAX, Avid, the Avid logo, Pro Tools, and RTAS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Avid Technology, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. All other product names and images, trademarks and artists names are the property of their respective owners, which are in no way associated or affiliated with IK Multimedia. Product names are used solely for the purpose of identifying the specific products that were studied during IK Multimedia’s sound model development and for describing certain types of tones produced with IK Multimedia’s digital modeling technology. Use of these names does not imply any cooperation or endorsement. IK Multimedia disclaims any ownership over content uploaded by users to ToneNET, including but not limited to Tone Models, Presets, and any text or symbols that users upload with their content. IK Multimedia does not endorse or represent any users of ToneNET, and any names, trademarks, or tradenames that users may upload with their content on ToneNET should not be construed as an endorsement, association, or affiliation with IK Multimedia. Users represent and warrant that they own or are licensed to use all intellectual property, including copyrights and trademarks, in any content that they upload. IK Multimedia disclaims that any content uploaded by users is non-infringing. Please see the ToneNET Terms of Use with ways that you can notify us if you believe content on ToneNET infringes your rights. ACOUSTIC® is a registered trademark of Guitar Center, Inc. AGUILAR® is a registered trademark of Boonshoft, David. AKG® is a registered trademark of AKG Acoustics GmbH. AMPEG® is a trademark of Yamaha Guitar Group, Inc. ARBITER® FUZZ FACE® is a registered trademark of Arbiter Group Plc. 559 Legal AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models BEYERDYNAMIC® is a registered trademark of Beyerdynamic GmbH & Co. BOGNER® is a registered trademark of Bogner Amplification. BOSS® is a trademark of Roland Corporation. BRAUNER® is a registered trademark of Dirk Brauner. CARVIN® is a registered trademark of Carvin Corporation. CELESTION™ is a trademark of Celestion International Ltd. DIEZEL® is a registered trademark of DIEZEL GMBH. DIGITECH WHAMMY™ is a registered trademark of Harman International Industries, Incorporated. DIMEBAG DARRELL™ name and likeness used under license of the Estate of Darrell Lance Abbott. DR. Z AMPLIFICATION® is a registered trademark of Dr. Z Amps, Inc. DUNLOP® is a registered trademark of Dunlop Manufacturing, Inc. ELECTRO-HARMONIX® is a registered trademark of New Sensor Corporation. ELECTRO-VOICE® is a trademark of Electro-Voice, Inc. ENGL® is a registered trademark of Edmund Engl. FENDER®, BASSMAN®, DELUXE REVERB®, SUPER REVERB® are registered trademarks of Fender Musical Instruments Corporation. FENDER®, BASSMAN®, TWIN REVERB®, DELUXE™, DELUXE REVERB®, VIBROVERB™, VIBRO-KING®, CHAMPION™ 600, SUPER-SONIC™, MH-500 METALHEAD™, PRO JUNIOR™, BASSMAN® 300, CYBER-TWIN®, BLENDER™, SUPER REVERB®, CHAMP®, PRINCETON®, are trademarks or registered trademarks of Fender Musical Instruments Corporation. FRIEDMAN® is a registered trademark of Robert Navarrette. FOXX® is a registered trademark of Mark Simonsen. FULLTONE® is a registered trademark property of Fulltone Musical Products, Inc. FURMAN® is a registered trademark of Furman Sound, Inc. FUZZRITE® is a registered trademark of Andy Moseley. GALLIEN-KRUEGER® is a registered trademark of Gallien-Krueger Corporation. GROOVE TUBES® MD1b-FET, GROOVE TUBES® VELO-8 are registered trademarks of ROKR Ventures, Inc. HIWATT® is a registered trademark of FERNANDES COMPANY LTD. IBANEZ® is a registered trademark of Hoshino Gakki Co. Ltd. Corporation. JBL® is a registered trademark of JBL Professional. JET CITY AMPLIFICATION 333® is a registered trademark property of 333 Enterprises Incorporated DBA Jet City Amplification Corporation. JIMI HENDRIX™ name used under license of Authentic Hendrix, LLC. © TM Authentic Hendrix, LLC. KAT® is a registered trademark of Knight Audio Technologies Ltd. LESLIE® is a trademark property of Hammond Organ/Leslie, wholly-owned brand subsidiaries of Suzuki Musical Instruments Mfg., Ltd. of Hamamatsu, Japan. MAESTRO® FUZZTONE is a registered trademark of Gibson Electronics. MARSHALL®, 1959 JTM100™ Super Lead, JMP100™ are registered trademarks and trademarks of Marshall Amplification Plc. 560 Legal AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models MESA/BOOGIE® and RECTIFIER® are trademarks of Mesa/Boogie Ltd. MORLEY® is a registered trademark of SOUND ENHANCEMENT PRODUCTS, INC. MOSRITE® is a registered trademark of Loretta Moseley. MU-TRON® III is a registered trademark of Zajac, Henry A., Jr. Washington, NJ 07882. MXR® is a registered trademark of Applied Research and Technology, Inc. NEUMANN® is a registered trademark of Georg Neumann GmbH. ORANGE® is a registered trademark property of Orange Music Electronic Company Ltd. PEAVEY® is a registered trademark of Peavey Electronics Corporation. PRO CO RAT™ is a trademark of ProCo Sound, Inc. PRS® is a registered trademark of Paul Reed Smith Guitars. RANDALL® is a registered trademark of Randall Amplifiers a division of U.S. Music Corp. ROCKMAN® is a registered trademark of Scholz Research & Development, Inc. ROGER MAYER™, Classic Fuzz®, Axis Fuzz®, Octavia®, are trademarks and registered trademarks of Roger Mayer. ROLAND® is a registered trademark of Roland Corporation. ROYER® is a registered trademark of Bulldog Audio, Inc. DBA Royer Labs Corporation. SEARS® is a registered trademark of Sears Brand, LLC. SENNHEISER® is a trademark of Sennheiser Electronic Corp. SEYMOUR DUNCAN® is a registered trademark of Carter Duncan Corporation. SHURE® is a registered trademark of Shure Incorporated. SILVERTONE® is a registered trademark of Samick Music Corporation. SOLDANO® is a registered trademark property of Synergy Audio, Inc. SUPRO® is a registered trademark of Absara Audio LLC. SWR® and Goliath™ are trademarks of SWR Sound Corporation. T-REX ENGINEERING® is a registered trademark property of T-Rex Engineering ApS Corporation. TECH 21 is a trademark of THD Electronics Ltd. THD® BIVALVE is a registered trademark of Tech 21 USA, Inc. TRACE ELLIOT is a registered trademark of Peavey Electronics Corporation. TUBE SCREAMER® is a registered trademark of Hoshino Gakki Co. Ltd. UNI-VIBE™ is a trademark of Korg USA Corporation. UNIVOX™ is a trademark of Korg USA Corporation. VHT® is a trademark of VHT Amplification, Inc. VOX®, VOX® WAH V846 and AC30 are registered trademarks of VOX Amplification Ltd. WAMPLER PEDALS® is a registered trademark property of Wampler Pedals, Inc. Z.VEX® is a registered trademark property of Zachary Vex. 5150® is a registered trademark of Edward Van Halen. 561 Legal IK Multimedia Production Srl Via dell’Industria, 46, 41122 Modena Italy IK Multimedia US, LLC 590 Sawgrass Corporate Pkwy. Sunrise, FL 33325 USA www.ikmultimedia.com All specifications are subject to change without further notice. © 2002-2023 IK Multimedia. All rights reserved. Version: 5.6.0 Latest Update: 2023/06/27 IK Multimedia Asia TB Tamachi Bldg. 1F, MBE #709 4-11-1 Shiba Minato-ku, Tokyo 108-0014 Japan

AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models

Related documents

Products

Support

AmpliTube 5 Custom Shop Gear Models

Related documents

Add this document to collection(s)

Add this document to saved

Suggest us how to improve StudyLib